HomeMy WebLinkAboutB07-0066 Project Manual Volume I (Division 6- Division 14)LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PARTI
- GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
I. Wood framing.
2. Wood supports.
3. Wood blocking.
4. Wood cants.
5. Wood nailers.
6. Wood subfloonng.
7. Wood underlayment.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product indicated.
I. Include data for wood - preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements.
t B.
Research /Evaluation Reports: For the following:
1. Treated wood.
2. Engineered wood products.
3. Power- driven fasteners.
4. Powder - actuated fasteners.
5. Expansion anchors.
6. Metal framing anchors.
7. Building and window wrap.
C.
Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturer's instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
1. For each type of preservative- treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating
type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
2. For waterborne- treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
3. For fire- retardant - treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated
materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to
bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities of treated materials.
PART 2-
PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers
specified.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1
J
L ION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.02
A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber
Standards Committee Board of Review.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or
back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by
grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 -inch
nominal thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
Engineered Wood Products: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model
code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
Allowable Design Stresses: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.03
A
2
C
11
WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process:
Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply
with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each
treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's
Board of Review.
Do not tise chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25
lb/cu. ft. (4.0 kg /cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry Iumber and plywood to a maximum moisture
content of 19 and 15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne
preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m).
Fire- Retardant - Treated Materials:
a. Where tire- retardant - treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of
AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire - retardant - treated wood
with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection,
Inc.; or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
b. Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior for wood exposed to
weather.
C. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or
defective pieces.
Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent
for plywood.
Mark each treated item with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-2
1
t
1
1�7!
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
2.04 PLYWOOD
A. Plywood: Provide either all- veneer, mat - formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2, "Per-
formance Standard for Wood -Based Structural-Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide ply-
wood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U_S_ Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Ply-
wood," where plywood is indicated.
B. Trademark: Factory mark structural -use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade
requirements.
C. Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA Form
No. E30, "APA Design /Constriction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
D. Plywood Underlayment: Underlayment B -C Exterior with fully sanded face, thickness as indicated but
not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
E. • Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: A -D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7
mm)_
F. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant - treated
plywood panels with grade, C -D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indi-
cated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick.
2.05 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. General: Of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading
Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated.
B. Non - Load - Bearing Interior Partitions: Grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings and any of the
following species.
I. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.
2. Northern species; NLGA.
3_ Western woods; WCL1B or WWPA.
C. Framing Other Than Non - Load - Bearing Partitions: Douglas Fir -Larch or Hem -Fir. Grade as indicated
on the Structural Drawings_
D. Exposed Framing: Hand select material for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics
that would impair finish appearance.
I . Species and Grade: As indicated above for load- bearing construction of sauce type.
E. Provide miscellaneous lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:
I . Rooftop bases and support curbs.
2. Blocking.
3. Cants.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
4. Nailers_
F. For items of dimension Iumber size, provide lumber grade as indicated on the Structural Drawings with
15 percent maximum moisture content of any species.
2.06 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT
A. Plywood Combination Subfloor - Underlayment: DOC PS I, single -floor panels as indicated on the
Structural Drawings.
B. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS I, Exterior, C -C Plugged, 3/4 inch thick.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners:
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative
humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2. Power - Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272.
3. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,
where indicated, flat washers.
B. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot -dip, zinc- coated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, zinc coating of one ounce per square foot.
I. Available Manufacturers:
a. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
b. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
C. Harlen Metal Products, Inc.
d. KC Metals Products, Inc.
e. Silver Metal Products, Inc-
f. Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Inc.
g. Southeastern Metals Manufacturing Co., Inc.
h. United Steel Products Company, Inc.
2. Research /Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
for which model code research /evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing
anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.
3. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
C. Sill - Sealer Gaskets: Glass- fiber- resilient insulation, Fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; (-
inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturers standard widths to suit
width of sill members indicated.
D. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG -01 that is
approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate, nailers,
blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
B. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber and
plywood.
C. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1. CABO NER -272 for power- driven fasteners.
2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
3. In accordance with "ICBO 2304.4.1."
D. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes
with wood filler.
E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA
Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and
applications indicated.
I . Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above - referenced guide.
FI. Fastening Methods:
L Combination Subfloor- Underlayment: Glue and nail to framing.
2. Underlayment: Nail or staple to subflooring.
END OF SECTION 06100
I I ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-5
L[ON SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06105 - MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
I. Wood furring, nailers, plywood and blocking.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturers instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
For each type of preservative- treated wood product, include certification by treating plant stating
type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards -
2. For waterborne- treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
3. For fire- retardant - treated wood products at all exterior walls, include certification by treating
plant that treated materials comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data
relative to bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities of treated materials.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and tinder
temporary coverings.
I . For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 WOOD - PRESERVATIVE- TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each
treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of
Review.
I. Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
B. Pressure treat aboveground items with waterborne preservatives to a minimum retention of 025 lb /cu. ft.
(4.0 kg/cu- tn). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and
15 percent, respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
I. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado '
C. Pressure treat wood members in contact with ground or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a
minimum retention of 0.40 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m). '
2.02 FIRE- RETARDANT- TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire- retardant - treated wood is indicated, comply with applicable requirements of ,
AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire- retardant- treated wood with appropriate
classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I . Treatment Types: Interior Type A for protected wood and Exterior for wood exposed to weather.
B.
Locations: all exterior walls, where plywood is required.
C.
Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.03
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
B.
Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items are not specified to receive wood preservative
treatment.
C.
Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRs of any
species. For board -size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA; No. 2
grade per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or WWPA of any species.
2.04
PLYWOOD
A. Plywood: Provide either all- veneer, mat - formed, or composite panels complying with DOC PS 2,
"Performance Standard for Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels," unless otherwise indicated. Provide
plywood panels complying with DOC PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial
Plywood," where plywood is indicated.
B. Trademark: Factory mark structural -use panels with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade '
requirements_
C_ Span Ratings: Provide panels with span ratings required to meet "Code Plus" provisions of APA Fon»
No. E30, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial."
D. Miscellaneous Concealed Panels: APA -rated sheathing, Exposure I, span rating to suit framing in each
location.
E. Plywood Underlayment: Underlayment B -C Exterior with fully sanded face, thickness as indicated but
not less than 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
F. Miscellaneous Exposed Plywood: A -D Interior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch (12.7
mm ).
G. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire - relardant- treated
plywood panels with grade, C -D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise
indicated, not less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick.
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-2 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.05 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this
Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high
relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304
stainless steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF -N -105.
C. Power - Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272.
D. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with
ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of carpentry and that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
C. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate Ft. Correlate location of
furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.
D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative- treated lumber and
plywood.
E. Securely attach carpentry work as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards.
F. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
G. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood.
3.02 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Cut and shape to
required size. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
B. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD PANELS
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Forst No. E30, "APA
Design /Constniction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and
applications indicated.
1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions of above - referenced guide.
END OF SECTION 06105
MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 06105-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06130 - HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes framing using rough sawn glulam columns, beams, braces and trusses.
B. See Drawings for sizes and locations.
1.02 DEFINITdONS
A. Timbers: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
B. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
2. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
3. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau_
4. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed timber not marked with grade
stamp.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Timber Standard: Comply with AITC 108, "Standard for Heavy Timber Construction_"
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Schedule delivery of heavy timber construction to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying
the Work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 HEAVY TIMBER, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by American
Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review, as applicable.
. Factory mark each item of timber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed timber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, apply grade stamps to surfaces
that will not be exposed to view or omit grade stamps and provide certificates of grade compliance
issued by grading agency.
2.02 TIMBER
A. Provide pressure treated fabricated members with airbome solution for above - ground use, complying
with AWPA C2.
I. Provide preservative treatment solution free of water repellents and other substances that might
interfere when applying finishes as required for timber work.
HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-1
HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B.
After fabrication and surfacing of each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of
each unit. Protect from moisture damage during on site storage by shrink wrapping prior to delivery or
providing a well ventilated covering.
'
C.
Provide protection for all members below grade.
'
D.
Refer to structural drawings for wood species, dimensional requirements, attachments, and connection
details.
E.
Timber Species and Grade: Balsam fir, Douglas fir- larch, hem -fir, southern pine; No. 2, NLGA, SPIB,
'
WCLIB, or WWPA.
F.
Moisture Content: Provide timber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.
G.
Dressing: Provide timber that is rough sawn (Rgh), unless indicated otherwise.
H.
End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the
'
transmission of moisture at cross -grain cuts.
I.
Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with
indicated finish.
2.03
TIMBER CONNECTORS
A.
General: Unless indicated, fabricate from the following
'
otherwise materials:
1. Structural -steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020.
'
3. Hot - rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 101 I, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33.
B.
Provide bolts, 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; nuts
complying with ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C.
Provide shear plates, 2 -5/8 inches in diameter, complying with ASTM D 5933.
D.
Finish fasteners inhibitive 2 dry film thickness_
'
steel assemblies and with rust- primer, -mil
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
Seal Coat: After fabricating and surfacing each unit, apply a saturation coat of penetrating sealer on
surfaces of each unit.
PART 3
- EXECUTION
'
3.01
INSTALLATION
i
A.
General: Erect heavy timber construction true and plumb. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines
and levels until permanent supporting members are in place.
B.
Fit members by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing_ Predrill for fasteners
and assembly of units_
I . Finish exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a Finish equivalent to
that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper.
'
2. Coat crosscuts with end sealer.
HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C_ Install timber connectors as indicated.
. Install bolts with orientation as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Contractor.
D. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged heavy timber
construction if repairs are not approved by Contractor.
END OF SECTION 06130
HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION 06130-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Wall sheathing_
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Building paper.
4. Sheathing joint- and - penetration treatment.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product. Indicate component materials
and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood - preservative treatment and ire - retardant treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.
B. Research /Evaluation Reports: For the following:
I _ Preservative - treated plywood.
2. Fire- retardant - treated plywood.
3. Foam- plastic sheathing.
4. Building wrap.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Test- Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire- resistance ratings, provide materials and
construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide
For air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
B. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2.
SHEATHING 06160-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 PRESERVATIVE- TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction-
C. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FIRE - RETARDANT - TREATED PLYWOOD
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C27.
1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for roof sheathing and where indicated.
3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated.
B_ Kiln -dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
C. Identify fire- retardant - treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing,
Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4 WALL SHEATHING
A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1 177/1 177M.
L Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G -P Gypsum
Corporation.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
2.5 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Glass -Mat Gypsum Roof Sheathing: ASTM C I I77/1177M.
I. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens- Deck" by G -P Gypsum
Corporation.
2. Type and Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch thick.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated.
I. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide fasteners with corrosion- protective coating having a
salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
SHEATHING 06160-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.7 SHEATHING JOINT - AND - PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
' A. Sealant for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric silicone joint sealant recommended by
sheathing manufacturer.
' B. Sheathing Tape for Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self - adhering glass -fiber tape, of type
recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers.
2.8 WEATHER - RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt - saturated organic felt), unperforated.
B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of
less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek
b. Ludlow Coated Products
c_ Pactiv, Inc.; GreenGuard
d. Raven Industries Inc.; Rufco -Wrap_
e_ Reemay, Inc.; Typar HouseWrap.
2. Water -Vapor Permeance: Not less than 152g through I sq. m of surface in 24 hours per
ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
C_ Building -Wrap Tape: Tape recommended by building -wrap manufacturer.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying will APA AFG -01 that is
approved for use indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
L Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Flexible Flashing. Self- adhesive, rubberized- asphalt compound, bonded to a high- density, polyethylene
film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 min).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
I . NES NER -272 for power- driven fasteners.
2. Table23- I1 -B -I, "Nailing Schedule," and Table23- 11 -B -2, "Wood Stnrctural Panel Roof
Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code."
SHEATHING
06160-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint - sealant installation so these materials are
installed in sequence and manner that exclude exterior moisture.
C. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural
support elements.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood
Construction Guide."
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail or staple to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at
edges of wall sheathing panels.
b. Screw to cold - formed metal framing.
2. Underlayment:
a. Nail or staple to subflooring.
3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA -253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
I . Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws.
2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold - formed metal framing with screws.
3. Install boards with a 318 -inch (9.5 -mm) gap where non - load - bearing construction abuts structural
elements.
4. Install boards with a 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) gap where they abut masonry, concrete or similar
materials.
3.4 SHEATHING JOINT- AND - PENETRATION TREATMENT
A. Sea] sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturers written instructions.
I. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient quantity of
sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Sea] other penetrations and
openings.
2. Apply glass -fiber sheathing tape to glass -mat gypsum sheathing board joints, and apply and trowel
silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed
fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.
3.5 WEATHER- RESISTANT SHEATHING -PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather- resistant sheathing paper as follows:
I . Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 nmm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion -
or control -joint locations.
SHEATHING 06160-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch (100 -mm) overlap, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2 -inch (50 -mm) overlap and a 6 -inch (150 -mm) end lap;
fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal comers with tape.
3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.
I. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm), except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over weather - resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
3. Lap weather- resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
4. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with weather -
resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing_ Apply covering immediately after sheathing is
installed.
END OF SECTION 06160
SHEATHING 06160-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06201 - EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Exterior standing and running trim.
2. Lumber siding.
3. Wood Shutters and hardware.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product.
B. Samples: For each type of siding indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC's Board of
Review.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2.2 WOOD- PRESERVATIVE - TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process:
I. Lumber: AWPA C2. Kiln dry after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having}urisdiction and containing no arsenic or
chromium.
3. Application: Where indicated.
2.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A. Lumber Trim:
I. Species and Grade: Western red cedar, Grade A; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2. Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
3. Face Surface: Surfaced (smooth) or Saw textured, per Architect.
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 - I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2A LUMBER SIDING
A. Provide kiln -dried lumber siding complying with DOC PS 20. '
B. Species and Grade: Grade A western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less ,
than 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate.
1. For prefinished items, provide matching prefinished aluminum fasteners where face fastening is
required.
B. Insect Screening for Soffit Vents: Aluminum, 18 -by -16 (1.4- by- 1.6 -mm) mesh.
C. Round Soffit Vents: Stamped aluminum louvered vents, 3 inches (76 mm) in diameter.
D. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in '
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants "; recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of
substrates for intended application.
E. Shutter hardware: Provide shutter hardware as indicated on Drawings, to include offset hinges
and shutter dogs.
1. Material: powder- coated galvanized metal.
2. Color: dark bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as '
recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
i
t
A. Install flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. 1
B. Install trim with minimum number of joints practical, using full- length pieces from maximum lengths of
lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (6 10 mm) long except where necessary.
1. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. ,
2. Stagger end joints in adjacent and related members.
l
C. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Cope at returns and miter at corners. ' Y
E
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 06201 -2 '"
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.3 SIDING INSTALLATION
A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B_ Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of siding
with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped I inch (25
mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of
siding.
END OF SECTION 06201
EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
06201 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I . Interior standing and running trim.
2. Interior frames and jambs.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips unless
concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For solid- surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories, handrail brackets and
finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large -scale details,
attachment devices, and other components.
C_ Samples:
I. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side
and one edge.
D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards."
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels daring the remainder of the constriction period.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Premium stain grade, species per Architect.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where
necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
. Interior Woodwork Grade: Premium stain grade.
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and
burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
3. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and in
GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.
B. Interior Standing and Running Trim:
1. For transparent - finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do
not glue for width.
2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except
for members with ends exposed in finished work.
3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field
assembly.
2.4 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until
after installation.
B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or printer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of
woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.
C. Transparent Finish:
L Grade: Premium stain grade.
2. AWI Finish System: Acrylic lacquer, Conversion varnish or Catalyzed vinyl.
3. Staining: Per Architect/Interior Designer.
4. Open -Grain Woods: do not use open grain wood.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas_
Examine shop - fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of
packing and backpriming.
B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400
mm). Shim as required with concealed shims.
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine
finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and
matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full - length pieces
(from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Scarf running joints and stagger
in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler,
sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 06415 - STONE COUNTERTOPS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stone countertops.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone and manufactured products.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C_ Samples: For each stone type indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone from a single quarry with resources to provide
materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
1. Make stone slabs available for Architect to examine for appearance characteristics. Architect will
select aesthetically acceptable slabs.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of constniction to receive stone countertops by field
measurements before fabrication.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GRANITE
A. Granite: Comply with ASTM C 615.
B. Fitness Restroom Countertop
. Material: Granite slab
2. Color: 4584 -07, Brazilian Topaz
3. Thickness: 1 with double bullnose facing edge"
4. Backsplash: W
5. Edge Detail:
a. Base option: eased square edge
b. Upgrade option: full bullnose.
C.
STONE COUNTERTOPS 06415- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Finish: Polished, or as selected by Architect_
2.2
ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Water - Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI Al 18.3.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bonsai, W. R. Company.
b. Bonstone Materials Corporation.
C. C -Cure.
d. Custom Building Products.
e. Laticrete International, Inc.
f. MAPEI Corp.
g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
B. Water- Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI At 18.3, chemical- resistant, water - cleanable, tile- setting and -
grouting epoxy.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Boiardi Products Corporation.
b. W. R. Bonsai Company.
C. Bostik Findley Inc.
d. C -Cure.
e. Custom Building Products.
f. Laticrete Intemational, Inc.
g. MAPEI Corp.
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
i. TEC Incorporated; H. B- Fuller Company.
C. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain- resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone
surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated_
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. Bostik Findley Inc.
b. Custom Building Products -
c. Hillyard, Inc.
d. HMK Stone Care System.
C. Miracle Sealants Company.
f Slone Care Intemational Inc.
g. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2.3 STONE FABRICATION
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that
could impair structural integrity or function.
STONE COUNTERTOPS
06415 -2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including
details on Drawings and Shop Drawings.
I. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of
edge profile to produce uni form shape throughout entire length of edge.
3. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated. Provide matching finish on
exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.
C. Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual."
D. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm). Gage backs to
provide units of identical thickness.
E. Splashes: Provide 3/4 -inch- (20 -mm -) thick backsplashes and end splashes, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.
G. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated and as
follows:
1. Grouted Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 min) in width.
2. Sealant - Filled Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width.
H. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or pattern
furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
2. Counter - Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter -
mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make
comer holes of largest radius practical.
3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and
similar items.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water - cleanable epoxy adhesive.
' B. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water - cleanable epoxy adhesive.
' C. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and Shop Drawings. Shim and adjust stone
to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according
to established relationships.
I D. Space joints with 1/16 -inch (1.5 -nun) gap for filling with grout or sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure
uniform spacing.
I. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly
aligned and joints are of specified width.
STONE COUNTERTOPS
06415-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NOR'rH
Vail, Colorado
E. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage
while cutting_ Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to
be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges
slightly to prevent snipping.
F. Install backsplash and end splash by adhering to wall with water - cleanable epoxy adhesive. Leave 1l16-
inch (1.5 -mm) gap between countertop and splash for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure
uniform spacing.
G. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A 108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout
uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.
H. Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. In- Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and
sealant smears immediately.
B. Clean stone countertops not less than six days after completion of sealant installation, using clean water
and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid -type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or
harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.
C. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written
instnrctions.
END OF SECTION 06415
STONE COUNTERTOPS 06415-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07141 - COLD FLUID - APPLIED WATERPROOFING
PART]- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cold fluid- applied polyurethane or latex - rubber waterproofing for use on substrates
at:
I . Foundation walls
2. Horizontal decks
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and
cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie -ins with adjoining waterproofing, and
other termination conditions_
C. Product test reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products.
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 STORAGE
A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within
the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. Protect stored
materials from direct sunlight.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A_ Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate,
when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 des F (3 deg C) above
dew point.
COLD FLUID- APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 - 1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, and agreeing to repair or
replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight for a
period of five years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, use the following:
1. Spray - applied Waterproofing:
a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; "Barricoat ", 60 mil
application thickness.
B. Other Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Single- Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing:
a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; A -H Seamless Membrane.
b. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW -525.
C. Cetco; LDC 60.
d. Karnak Corporation; One -Kote System.
e. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 201.
f. Miradri, T. C.; Miraseal.
g. Neogard, Div. of Jones - Blair; Neogard 7403/7405.
h. Pacific Polymers, Inc.; Elasto -Deck B.T.
i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 500.
j. Sonnebome, Div. ofChemRex Inc.; HLM 5000.
k. Tremco; Tremproof 60.
1. United Coatings; Elastall 1000.
2. Two- Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing:
a. Futura Coatings, Inc., Subsidiary of iPl International, Inc.; Futura -Flex 518.
b. Gaco Western Inc.; LM -60.
C. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 222.
3. Single- Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing:
a. Neogard, Div. of Jones - Blair; Permagard 7410.
b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 101.
C. 3M Construction Markets: Scotch Clad 5893/5864.
4. Two - Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing:
a. Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Div.; CCW 703 Liquiseal. t
b. Lynttal International, Inc.; Isoflex 550 SP.
C. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 102.
d. Stellar -Mark, Pro -Deck 7520.
e. 3M Constnuction Markets; FC 100.
COLD FLUID - APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -2
i
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
5. Two- Component, Unmodified Latex - Rubber Waterproofing:
a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Procor.
2.2 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Cold Fluid - Applied Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836.
B. Primer: Manufacturer's standard, factory- formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer.
C. Sheet Flashing: 50 -mil- (1.3 -mm -) minimum, nonstaining uncured sheet neoprene.
I. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.
D. Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.
2.3 MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage.
B. Nonwoven-Geotexti le- Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface
drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle - punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening
size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21 -mm) sieve laminated to I side and a polymeric film bonded to the other
side of a 3- dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded- plastic -sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate
of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. (112 to 188 Umin. per m).
C. Woven - Geotextile- Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage
panels consisting of a woven - geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43 -
mm) sieve laminated to t side of a 3- dimensional, nonbiodegradable, molded- plastic -sheet drainage core,
with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm per ft. (35 Umin. per m)_
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturers written recommendations. Provide clean, dust -
free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
I. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic
sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
B. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing
fluids.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form- release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating
contaminants or film- forming coatings from concrete.
D_ Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.
E. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at
expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
COLD FLUID - APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07141 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
I . Apply a double thickness of waterproofing and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat
when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with
ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.
G. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
I . Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according
to ASTM C 898.
1
3.2
WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases,
with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils (1.5 mm) and a minimum dry film thickness of 50
mils (1.3 tnm) at any point.
B. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent
construction operations.
3.3
MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded -sheet drainage panels to substrate according to manufacturer's written
instructions_ Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric
to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded -sheet drainage panels during subsequent constriction.
3.4
CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING
A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent
contamination and damage during application stages and curing.
1. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended
by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07141
r—,
t
1
COLD FLUID- APPLIED WATERPROOFING
07141 -4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This
Section includes the following:
I .
Perimeter insulation under slabs -on- grade.
2.
Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill).
3.
Cavity-wall insulation.
4.
Concealed building insulation.
5.
Exposed building insulation.
6.
Loose -fill building insulation.
7.
Self- supported, spray - applied cellulosic insulation.
8.
Vapor retarders.
9.
Sound attenuation insulation.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass -fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test
performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per
"Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from
another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or
delantination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500 -fpm (13 -m/s)
air velocity.
2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth,
delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with
Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in
the dark.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: Full -size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.
C. Product test reports.
D. Research /Evaluation Reports: For foam - plastic insulation_
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Retain ASTM test method below based on product and kind of fire - resistance characteristic specified for
each product in Part 2. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with
the fire- test - response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84 for surface - burning characteristics and other methods indicated with product, by UL or
BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials
with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
2.2 FOAM - PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A. Extruded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, with maximum flame - spread and smoke -
developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively:
I . Available Manufacturers:
a_ DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company.
c. Owens Coming.
d. Pactiv Building Products Division.
B. Fabric - Faced, Extruded- Polystyrene Drainage Pastels: ASTM C 578, Type V1, with a density of 1.80
lb/cu. ft. (29 kg/cu. m), faced with insulation manufacturer's standard nonwoven filtration Fabric and
fabricated with 1 side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels.
I _ Available Manufacturers:
a. Owens Coming.
b. 'F_ Clear Corporation.
2.3 GLASS -FIBER BOARD INSULATION (FOR ACOUSTICAL PARTITIONS)
A. Location: Acoustical partitions, at locations indicated on plans. Install to fill space and as required to
achieve STC ratings indicated on plans.
B. Available Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Johns Manville.
3. Knauf Fiber Glass.
4. Owens Coming.
C. Unfaced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553, Types 1, 11, and
III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50,
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-2
r
1
1
J
t
i
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
respectively, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and with a nominal density to achieve
an STC rating of 50 for the wall assembly.
2.4 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass.
5. Owens Corning_
B. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25 and 50,
respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
C. Faced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane
facing), Class A (membrane -faced surface with a flame- spread index of 25 or less); Category I
(membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil - scrim -krafl, foil - scrim, or foil - scrim - polyethylene vapor -
retarder membrane on I face.
1. Install kraft -faced batts below enclosed ceiling.
2. Install foil -faced batts above ceiling.
2.5 SLAG - WOOL- FIBER/ROCK- WOOL -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A. Location: Acoustical partitions, at locations indicated on plans. Install to fill space and as required to
achieve STC ratings indicated on plans.
B_ Available Manufacturers:
I. Fibrex Insulations Inc.
2. Owens Corning.
3. Thermafiber.
C. Unfaced, Slag -Wool- Fiber /Rock -Wool -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without
membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 25
and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
2.6 LOOSE -FILL INSULATION
A. Cellulosic -Fiber Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 739, chemically treated for flame- resistance,
processing, and handling characteristics.
B. Glass -Fiber Loose -Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type I for pneumatic application or Type II for poured
application; with maximum flame - spread and smoke - developed indexes of 5_
I I BUILDING INSULATION
07210-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.7 SPRAY- APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION
A. Self- Supported, Spray- Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type I (materials applied with
liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated for flame -
resistance, processing, and handling characteristics.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D4397, 6 mils (0.15 mm) thick, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.13 perm (7.5 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).
B. Vapor- Retarder Tape: Pressure - sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor - retarder manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C. Vapor- Retarder Fasteners: Pancake -head, self - tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.
D. Single- Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related
to exposure, and Use O related to vapor - barrier- related substrates_
E. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor- retarder manufacturer and with
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.
2.9 INSULATION LOCATIONS
A. Provide building insulation of rigid and blanket types as applicable:
I . Exterior walls: Glass fiber blanket type and rigid per plans; R -19_
2. Soffits: Glass fiber blanket type; R -30.
3. Foundation walls (exterior face): Rigid, 2" thick.
4. Slabs on grade: Rigid, 2" thick, at perimeter.
5. Interior walls (acoustic): Sound attenuation blankets per wall types on plans to achieve an STC
rating of 50 at unit demising walls and floor /ceiling assemblies.
B. Provide vapor barrier at building perimeter. Vapor barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene sheet.
C. Perimeter insulation 2 inches thick four feet high, closed cell expanded polystyrene. At first floor slab on
grade area, apply vertically at the foundation wall.
D. Glass fiber batt insulation (1.7 p.c.f.) R -19 at walls (stud cavity) at all heated spaces, friction -fil, use
mechanical fasteners where required. Provide Kraft paper backing on batts used below the ceiling line
and foil -faced above the ceiling.
E. Acoustical partition insulation: Semi -rigid glass fiber (3 p.c.f.), 3 1/2 inch thick, or mineral wool blankets
(frill thickness). Friction fit between studs. Provide in partitions unit demising walls, floor /ceiling
assemblies, mechanical room, and all separations between public and non - public spaces. Refer also to
Division 9, gypsum board systems, and to plans for interior wall types requiring insulation.
F. Provide R -46 insulation at roof structure.
G. Perimeter wall firesafing and sealants, firesafing at pipe, duct, and conduit penetrations, and top -of -wall
firesafing where required to maintain fire ratings.
H. Fill all void spaces in exterior assemblies with glass fiber blanket insulation.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-4
1
ii
I
1
1
r
t
I
LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.10 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between
roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
2.11 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate or Angle formed from perforated galvanized carbon -
steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square, welded to projecting copper- coated
steel spindle 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter and of length capable of holding insulation of thickness
indicated securely in position with 1 -112 -inch- (38 -mm -) square or diameter self - locking washers
complying with the following requirements:
1. Insulation- Retaining Washers: Self- locking washers formed from 0.016 -inch- (0.41 -mm -) thick
galvanized steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness.
B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
II PART 3 - EXECUTION
I I BUILDING INSULATION
07210-5
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation m anti facturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to
ice, rain, and snow.
C.
Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around
obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Water- Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior wails, coordinate location
of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.
E.
For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from
manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to
produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total
thickness.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER -SLAB INSULATION
A.
On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer.
I. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior
grade line.
I I BUILDING INSULATION
07210-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
C. Protect below -grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying
protection course with joints butted. Set in adhesive according to insulation manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete work by applying protection
course with joints butted.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY -WALL INSULATION
A. On units of foam - plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610
mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation
between wail ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly
against inside substrates indicated.
Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two -piece wall ties
designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical
anchorage to provide pennanent placement and support of units.
B. Seal joints between foam - plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each
unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive,
mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Set vapor- retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm -in- winter side of construction, unless
otherwise indicated.
Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
surrounding constriction to ensure airtight installation.
D. Install mineral -fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than
one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities fonned by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of
insulation and adjoining framing members_
3. Maintain 3 -inch (76 -mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.
4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented
eaves.
5. For metal- framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced
blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to Flanges of
metal studs.
E. Place loose -fill insulation into spaces indicated, either by pouring or by machine blowing, to comply with
ASTM C 1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform
density, but do not compact excessively.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210-6
fl
u
1
t
t
G'
�J
r
I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
For cellulosic -fiber loose -fill insulation, comply with the Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers
Association's Special Report #3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
F. Apply self - supported, spray - applied cellulosic insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and electrical outlets in walls is
completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not indicated to receive insulation are masked.
After insulation is applied, make it flush with face of studs by using method recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
G. Stuff glass -fiber loose -fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact
to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb /cu.
ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR SOUND ATTENUATION
A. Acoustical partition insulation: Semi -rigid glass fiber (3 p.c.f.), 3 1/2 inch thick, or mineral wool blankets
(full thickness). Friction fit between studs. Provide in partitions unit demising walls, floor /ceiling
assemblies, mechanical room, and all separations between public and non - public spaces. Refer also to
Division 9, gypsum board systems, and to plans for interior wall types requiring insulation.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure
in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation.
13_ Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor
retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints.
Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor- retarder fasteners as
recommended by vapor - retarder manufacturer.
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with
vapor- retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.
E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with
vapor - retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
END OF SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
07210-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07311 - ASPHALT SHINGLES
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A_ This Section includes the following:
I . Asphalt shingles.
2. Self- adhering sheet underlayment.
3. Ridge vents.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples: For asphalt shingles, ridge and hip cap shingles, and ridge vent_
C. Product test reports.
D. Research /evaluation reports.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles ridge vents and self - adhering sheet underlayment
through one source from a single asphalt shingle manufacturer.
B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with the fire -
test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method below
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes
indicated.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt
shingles that fail in materials within specified warranty period.
I. Material Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with first 5
years nonprorated, or manufacturer's standard warranty, whichever is greater.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 0731 1 - 1
i
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
2.2 GLASS - FIBER - REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Laminated -Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi -ply overlay constriction, glass -fiber
reinforced, mineral - granule surfaced, and self - sealing.
1. Basis of Design Products:
a. CertainTeed Corporation; Independence. Color by Architect.
B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.
2.3 ' UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self - Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Granular Surfaced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 55 -mil- (1.4 -mm -)
thick sheet; glass - fiber- mat - reinforced, SBS- modified asphalt; mineral - granule surfaced; with release
paper backing; cold applied_
B. Self- Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, mininnum of 40 -mil- (1.0- min-
) thick, slip- resisting, polyethylene -film- reinforced top surface laminated to SBS - modified asphalt
adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied.
2.4 RIDGE VENTS
A. Rigid Ridge Vent: Manufacturer's standard rigid section high- density polypropylene or other UV-
stabilized plastic ridge vent with nonwoven geotextile filter strips and with external deflector baffles; for
use under ridge shingles.
1. Available Products:
a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent I1.
b. Cor -A -Vent, Inc.; V- Series.
c. GAF Materials Corporation; Cobra Rigid Vent 11.
d. Globe Building Materials, Inc.; SmartAir Ridge Vent.
C. Lomanco, Inc.; OR-4.
f. Mid - America Building Products; RidgeMaster Plus.
g. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated; Xtractor Vent X 18.
h. Owens Coming; VentSure Ridge Vent.
i. Ridglass Manufacturing Company, Inc.; Coolvent.
j. Solar Group, Inc. (The), a Gibraltar Company; PRV4.
k. Trimline Building Products, Trimline Ridge Vent.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -2
f '
J
I
,[I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type 11, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless - steel, copper, or hot -dip galvanized steel wire shingle
nails, minimum 0.120 -inch- (3 -mm -) diameter, barbed shank, sharp - pointed, with a minimum 3 /8 -inch-
(9.5-mm-) diameter flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 314 inch (19 mm) into solid wood
decking or extend at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing.
I. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.
2.6 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim."
I _ Sheet Metal: Anodized aluminum, Kynar dark bronze finish.
B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYM ENT INSTALLATION
A. Self - Adhering Sheet Underlaynnent: Install self - adhering sheet tmderlayment, wrinkle free, on roof deck.
Comply with low - temperature installation restrictions of tnderlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install
at locations indicated, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3 -1/2 inches (89 mm).
Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with
roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.
3.2 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
I. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing
I ' Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual."
' 3.3 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's
' "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least
' 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self - sealing strip face tip at roof edge.
I. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) over fascia at eaves and rakes.
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -3
F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. ,
G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap
cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of
sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
END OF SECTION 07311
t
I I
r
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
'
C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair - stepping diagonally across roof deck with
manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure_
D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
,
E. Closed -Cut Valleys: Extend asphalt shingle strips from one side of valley 12 inches (300 mm) beyond
center of valley. Use one -piece shingle strips without joints in the valley. Fasten with extra nail in upper
end of shingle. Install asphalt shingle courses from other side of valley and cut back to a straight line 2
inches (50 mm) short of valley centerline. Trim upper concealed comers of cut -back shingle strips.
,
1. Do not nail asphalt shingles within 6 inches (150 mm) of valley center.
2. Set trimmed, concealed -corner asphalt shingles in a 3 -inch- (75 -mm -) wide bed of asphalt roofing
cement.
'
F. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing. ,
G. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap
cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of
sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
END OF SECTION 07311
t
I I
r
ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 -4 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07411 - METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Factory- formed and field- assembled, standing -seam metal roof panels.
B. Steel Sheet Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without metallic coatings or painted finishes.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind- uplift resistance class indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the loads and stresses
specified by Structural Engineer of Record, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated_
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
I. Include details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings,
closures, and accessories.
2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer
responsible for their preparation.
C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with penetrations
and roof-mounted items_
D. Samples: For each exposed finish.
E. Material certificates.
F. Field quality- control inspection reports.
G. Product test reports.
H. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado '
1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal roof panel assemblies and
providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. '
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard fort in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ,
components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period. ,
I . Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. ,
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to '
repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ,
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ,
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product
selection: ,
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers
specified. '
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip '
process and prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
I. Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM 150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality_
3_ Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
4. Exposed Finishes:
a. High - Performance Organic Finish: Three -coat, thermocured system with Fluoropolymer
coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; ,
complying with physical properties and coating performance requirements of AAMA 2605.
i
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -2
LION SQUARE LODCE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
5. Concealed Finish: White or light- colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
' B. Panel Sealants:
' I . Sealant Tape: Pressure- sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper
backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer.
3. Butyl- Rubber- Based, Solvent- Reiease Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self- Adhering, High - Temperature Sheet: 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick minimum, consisting of
slip- resisting polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive,
with release -paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
I. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 1970_
2. Low Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C); ASTM D 1970.
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 lb /100 sq. ft. (0.24 kg/sq. m), rosin sized.
2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Gypsum Board: Type X, of thickness indicated, ASTM C 442 or ASTM C 36.
B. Substrate -Board Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion - resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to substrate.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
I. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot -dip galvanized zinc coating.
B. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated.
2. Depth: As indicated.
C_ Z- Shaped Furr ing: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment
flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum bare metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required
to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Self- tapping screws, bolls, nuts, self - locking rivets and bolts, end - welded studs, and other
suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching
color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self- drilling or self - tapping, zinc - plated, hex -head carbon -steel screws,
with a stainless -steel cap or zinc - aluminum -alloy head and EPDM or neoprene sealing washer.
2. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self - drilling or self - tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel hex
washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of
metal roof panels.
3. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws with hex washer head.
4. Blind Fasteners: High - strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets.
B. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4 -mm) dry
film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur
components, and other deleterious impurities.
METAL ROOF PANELS
2.7
A. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Factory- formed, designed to be field assembled by lapping and
interconnecting raised side edges of adjacent panels with joint type indicated and mechanically attaching
panels to supports using concealed clips in side laps. Include clips, cleats, pressure plates, and
accessories required for weathertight installation_
1. Steel Panel Systems: Comply with ASTM E 1514.
2. Available Manufacturers:
a. AEP -Span.
b. Architectural Building Components.
C. Architectural Roofing and Siding, Inc.
d. ATAS International, Inc.
e. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
f. BHP Steel Building Products USA Inc.
g. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.
h. Copper Sales Inc.
i. Custom Panel Industries, LLC.
j. Delcoa Industries, Inc.
k. Fabral, Inc.
1. Flexospan Steel Buildings, Inc.
m. Galvanuet Inc.
n. Innovative Metals Company, Inc.
o. K- Metals Inc.
P. MBCI; Div. of NCI Building Systems.
q. McElroy Metal, Inc.
r. Merchant & Evans, Inc.
S. Metal -Fab M anti facturing, LLC.
t. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corporation.
IL Modem Metal Systems, Inc.
V. Morin Corporation; a Metecno Group Company.
W. Perma -Clad Products_
x. Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
Y_ Steelox Systems Inc.
Z. United Steel Deck, Inc.: Subsidiary of Bouras Industries, Inc.
aa. VICWEST, Div. of Jenisys Engineered Products.
3. Type: Vertical rib, seamed joint as indicated on Drawings.
4. Material: Metallic - coated steel sheet, 0.0269 inch (0.70 mm) thick.
a. Exterior Finish: Fluuoropolymer.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -4
11
'J
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
5. Clips: Floating to accommodate thermal movement.
a. Material: Metallic- coated -steel sheet.
' 6. Joint Type: Double folded.
7. Panel Coverage: Per drawings, Contractor to indicate on shop drawings_
8. Uplift Rating: UL 60.
' 2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly
' including trim, copings, fasciae, comer units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,
closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise
indicated.
'
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels.
2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick, stainless -steel panel clips designed to withstand
negative -load requirements.
3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250 -inch- (0.64 -mm -) thick,
stainless -steel or nylon- coated aluminum sheet.
4. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin -foam or closed -
cell laminated polyethylene; minimum [-inch- (25 -mm -) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or
'
premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary
to ensure weathertight construction.
B.
Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179 -inch- (0.45 -mm -) thick, metallic- coated steel sheet. Provide
flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations
include eaves, rakes, comers, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim
with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels.
'
2.9
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible,
by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional
'
and structural requirements.
B.
Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel.
C.
Where indicated, fabricate metal roof panel joints with factory- installed captive gaskets or separator strips
'
that provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, in a manner that will minimize noise from
movements within panel assembly.
D.
Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
E_
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping_
I METAL ROOF PANELS
07411 -5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A. Substrate Board: Install substrate boards over roof deck on entire roof surface. Attach with substrate -
board fasteners.
Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
Comply with UL requirements for fire -rated construction.
B. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
3.2
A. Self - Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self - adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on roof
sheathing under metal roof panels. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer
for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply over
entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered
24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3 -1/2 inches (90 mm). Extend
underlayment into gutter trough. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days_
B. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels.
3.3
METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from cave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or
restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
I . Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Rigidly fasten cave end of metal roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal
expansion and contraction. Predrill panels.
3. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls and each side of ridge and hip caps_
4. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all
openings. Fasten with self - tapping screws.
5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end
laps to avoid a four -panel lap splice condition.
6. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to nm over and off the material.
B. Fasteners:
I. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
2. Aluminum Roof Panels: Use aluminum or stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the
exterior and aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized - asphalt
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof
panel manufacturer.
METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 -6
t
t
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Coat back side of aluminum roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact
wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint filters, and sealants where indicated and where required for
weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies.
I . Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel_ Seal side
joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint
Sealants."
3.4 FIELD- ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each
' standing -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install clips to supports with self - tapping fasteners.
2. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging
factory- applied sealant.
3. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer- approved motorized seamen tool so clip,
metal roof panel, and factory- applied sealant are completely engaged.
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION '
1
1
1
1 ,
i]
General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide
for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with fleshings and other components.
1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings,
ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible,
and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will
be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
3. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building.
4. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed,
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal
roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.
Maintain in a clean condition during constnuction.
END OF SECTION 07411
I METAL ROOF PANELS
07411 -7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07460 —SIDING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
I _ Fiber- cement board siding and accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include identification of materials; dimensions of
individual components; installation instructions; and available profiles, textures, and colors.
B. Samples for Verification: Full -size units of each type of siding and trim indicated; in sets for each color,
texture, and pattern specified.
1. 12 -inch long -by- actual -width sample of siding.
2. 12 -inch long -by- actual -width sample of trim.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A_ Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed siding installations similar
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that has resulted in construction with a record
of successfiil in- service performance.
B. Source Limitations for Siding and Accessories: Obtain each color, texture, pattern, and type of siding and
related accessories from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties without delaying the Work_
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and if substrate is
completely dry.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,
and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents_
B. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by siding manufacturer, agreeing to repair
or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures
include, bit( are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading, or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal
weathering. Fading is defined as loss of color, after cleaning with product recommended by
manufacturer, of more than 4 color - difference units as measured according to ASTM D 2244.
SIDING 07460-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Warranty Period for Siding: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER - CEMENT BOARD AND SHINGLE SIDING
A. Fiber- Cement Siding: Siding made from fiber- cement board that complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A,
Grade 1I; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame - spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Cemplank, Inc.; .
b. CertainTeed Corp.;.
C. GAF Materials Corporation;.
d. James Hardie Inc.;
C. MaxiTile, Inc.;
3. Vertical Pattern: Boards , *-1!4 a ti -i 2 inches (210 to 216 nun) wide in vertical plank style and
rough sawn or wood grain texture, as approved by Architect.
4. Factory primed, or stained and sealed: selection per Architect — provide samples of each product,
professionally prepared.
2.2 SOFFIT
A. Fiber- Cement Soffit: Panels with wood -grain texture, non - perforated, made from fiber- cement board that
complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade 11; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to
ASTM E t 36; and has a flame - spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84_
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Backer rod and caulk for 3/8" gap or galvanized metal flashing between siding and adjacent materials.
B. Siding Accessories: Provide starter strips, edge trim, window head flashing, comer cap, and other items
as recommended by manufacturer for building configuration; match type of siding.
I. Base Membrane: Carlisle continuous CCW WIP 400
2. Base Flashing: 24 Guage galvanized sheet metal
3. Base Sealant: Karnak Elasto -caulk #229 AR
C. Fasteners: Noncorrosive aluminum siding nails, insufficient length to penetrate a minimum of I inch (25
mm) into substrate_ Provide prefinished fasteners in color to match preFinished siding where face nailing
is unavoidable.
SIDING 07460-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance of siding. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots
without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction
of prevailing wind.
B. Install siding, and accessories according to ASTM D 4756.
C. Maintain 3/8" gap between ends of planks and adjacent building elements. Install backer rod and sealant
these locations (30 -year silicone).
D. Isolate dissimilar metals by separating from siding with rubber gaskets, elastomeric sealant, or rubber
washers where fasteners penetrate siding. Dissimilar metals behind siding may be isolated by covering
with polyethylene film.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials with new
materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
END Of SECTION 07460
SIDING 07460-3
L[oN SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SARNAFIL GREEN ROOF OVER C'ONCR1 = "hI; E)F:CCK: CONCRETE
INSULATK_)N, WITI..I ME.MB RAN FIN DRAIN�AGi' (UM P( M -AT.
MEMBRANE PROVIDE- UV R-E S.I STAN C.F_,. FILTER FABRIC. AND
( WWW.SARNAFIL.CA (ALTERNATE: AiN41 RICAN WICK DRAIN CORP..
OF SYSTEM)
SECTION 07540 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes loosely laid and ballasted membrane roofing systems for use with installation of
sod roof over concrete deck as indicated on Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each product included in membrane roofing system.
D. Research /evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products.
B_ Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from roofing membrane
manufacturer.
C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire- test - response
characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG,
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer
agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship
within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks.
I I THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
07540- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
r
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product ,
selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers
specified.
1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers
specified.
2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE ,
A. Fabric - Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic
polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows:
1. Basis of Design Manufacturer:
a. Sarnaf;l Inc. Green Roof basis of design.
2. Alternate Manufacturer: ,
a. American Wick Drain, Inc.
3. Other Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Duro -Last Roofing, Inc.
Firestone Building Products Company.
C.
Flex Membrane International, Inc.
d.
GAF Materials Corporation.
e.
GenFlex Roofing Systems.
f.
IB Roof Systems.
g.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
h.
Mule -Hide Products Co., Inc.
4. Thickness: 80 mils (1.5 mm), actual_
5. Exposed Face Color: Gray.
6. Physical Properties:
a.
Provide enhanced UV resistance at exposed areas
b.
Breaking Strength: 225 Ibf (I kN); ASTM D 751, grab method.
C.
Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
'
d.
Tearing Strength: 55 Ibf (245 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
C.
Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F (30 deg C).
F.
Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3- incli- (75 -mm -) diameter
mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F (40 deg C) and an ozone
level of 100 pphm (100 mPa); ASTM D 1 t49.
g.
Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation
at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 573.
h.
Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at
158 deg F (70 deg C): ASTM D 471.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 5 1
07.40 - 2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
i. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
2.3
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with membrane roofing.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyoleftn sheet flashing, 55 mils
(1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent -based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent -
based bonding adhesive for base flashings.
D_ Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless -steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.
E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum- zinc - alloy- coated or zinc - coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide by 0.05 inch (13 mm) thick, prepunched.
F. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane
roofing system manufacturer.
G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, slip
sheet, and other accessories.
MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
2.4
A. Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 2 Section "Subdrainage."
B. Woven- Geotextile- Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage
panels consisting of a woven- geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40
(0.425 -mm) sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded,
nonbiodegradable, molded- plastic -sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm
per fl. (35 L /min, per m).
ROOF INSULATION
2.5
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type 11, fell or glass -fiber mat facer on both major
surfaces.
B_ Tapered Insulation: Provide factory- tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12
inches (1:48), unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for
sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated_
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING
07540-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing
system manufacturer.
B. Cold Fluid - Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid - applied adhesive formulated to adhere
roof insulation to substrate.
2.7 AGGREGATE BALLAST
A. Aggregate Ballast: Smooth, washed, riverbed gravel or other acceptable smooth -faced stone;
ASTM D 448, Size 4, ranging from 3/4 to 1 -1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm).
B. Filter Fabric: Provide filter fabric capable of screening sod particles as required for a complete
installation of the sod roof system. Place above aggregate and immediately below installation of soil
for sod roof system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation
or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install one or more layers of insulation tinder area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where
overall insulation thickness is 1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (1 50 mm) in each
direction.
E_ Loosely Laid Insulation: Loosely lay insulation units.
3.2
LOOSELY LAID AND BALLASTED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions. Unroll rooting membrane and allow to relax before installing.
B. Adhere roofing membrane at corners, perimeters, and transitions according to requirements in
ANSI /SPRI RPA.
C. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot -air weld side and end laps of roofing
membrane according to manufacturers written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Sod Roof System Aggregate Ballast: Apply aggregate ballast uniformly over roofing membrane at rate
required by membrane roofing system manufacturer, but not less than the following, spreading with care
to minimize possibility of damage to membrane roofing system. Lay ballast as roofing membrane is
installed, leaving roofing membrane ballasted at the end of the workday.
. Coordinate requirements with civil and landscape sections and drawings.
3.3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply solvent -based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and
allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field- formed inside and outside comers with sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to
ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B_ Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing
installation on completion and submit report to Architect.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07540
THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 07540-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07551 - APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes APP - modified bituminous membrane roofing.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its
viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop - applied roofing asphalt and 75 centipoise for mechanical spreader -
applied roofing asphalt, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C), measured at the mop cart or
mechanical spreader immediately before application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system.
D. Research /evaluation reports.
E. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's
products.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system
manufacturer.
C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire- test - response characteristics
indicated as detennined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I . Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated.
D. Preinstaliation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by
manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in
APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 - I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
materials or workmanship within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof
leaks.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the Following:
I. APP - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing:
a.
American Lubricants Co., Inc_
b.
Bitec Inc.
C.
CertainTeed Corporation.
d.
Dibiten USA.
e.
Ecology Roof Systems.
f.
Firestone Building Products Company.
g.
GAF Materials Corporation.
h.
Garland Co., Inc. (The)_
i.
Hickman, W. P. Systems Inc.
j.
Honeywell Commercial Roofing Systems.
k.
ICA, Inc.
1.
IKO Industries.
m.
Johns Manville International, Inc.
n.
Koppers Industries, Inc.
o.
Malarkey Roofing Company.
p.
Performance Roof Systems, Inc.
q.
Polyglass USA, Inc.
r.
Texas Refinery Corporation.
S.
U.S. Intec, Inc.
2.2 APP - MODIFIED ASPHALT -SHEET MATERIALS
A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade S, Type I or 11, polyester - reinforced, APP - modified
asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified.
B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester- reinforced, APP -
modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows:
I. Granule Color: Gray.
2.3 BASE -SHEET MATERIALS
A. Sheathing Paper: Red -rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg /sq. m).
2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS
A. Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or 11, polyester- reinforced, APP - modified asphalt sheet;
granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows:
APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Granule Color. Gray.
2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with roofing membrane.
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41.
C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
application.
D. Cold- Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt- based, one- or two -part,
asbestos -free, cold- applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility and use with roofing
membrane and base flashings.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system
manufacturer for application.
F. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by
manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 36, Type X gypsum wall board, 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick.
B. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion - resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel to roof deck.
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type 11, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major
surfaces.
B. Composite Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, faced with insulation board on one major
surface, as indicated below by type, and felt or glass -fiber mat facer on the other.
C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory- tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12
inches (1 :48), unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for
sloping to drain_ Fabricate to slopes indicated.
1
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory- coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion- resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing
system manufacturer.
APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
07551 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Cold Fluid - Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid - applied adhesive formulated to adhere
roof insulation to substrate.
C. Wood Nailer Strips: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry."
D. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.
E. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 208, Type I1, Grade 1, cellulosic -fiber insulation board.
F. Tapered Edge Strips: ASTM C 726, glass -fiber insulation board.
2.9 WALKWAYS
A_ Walkway Pads: Mineral - granule- surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip- resisting pads,
manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 1/2 inch (13
mm) thick, minimum.
1. Pad Size: 24 inches wide.
B. Walkway Cap Sheet Strips: ASTM D 6222, Grade G, Type I or II, polyester- reinforced, APP - modified
asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows:
1. Granule Color: Gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end
joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
I. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
B. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45- degree insulation cant strips at junctures of
roofing membrane system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where
overall insulation thickness is 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each
direction_
E. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical surfaces.
APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -4
F. Install modified biluminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's
written instructions, starting at tow point of roofing system_ Extend roofing membrane sheets over and
terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:
L Adhere to substrate in cold - applied adhesive.
2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by
manufacturer.
G. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end
laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.
I I. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
H. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.
3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at
penetrations through root; and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and
4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing menmbrane.
1 APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
F.
Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of
insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board -type roof insulation to deck type.
L Install subsequent layers of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid - applied adhesive.
G.
Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered
between rows. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
3.3
ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A.
Install roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturers written instructions and
applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of
Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing."
B.
Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches (1:24), install roofing membrane sheets parallel with
slope.
C.
Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system
not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or
when rain is forecast.
D.
Substrate -Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt From penetrating substrate joints, entering building,
or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction.
E.
Loosely lay one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6
inches (150 mm), respectively.
F. Install modified biluminous roofing membrane sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's
written instructions, starting at tow point of roofing system_ Extend roofing membrane sheets over and
terminate beyond cants, installing as follows:
L Adhere to substrate in cold - applied adhesive.
2. Unroll roofing membrane sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required by
manufacturer.
G. Laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end
laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.
I I. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
H. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water.
3.4 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at
penetrations through root; and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above roofing membrane and
4 inches (100 mm) onto field of roofing menmbrane.
1 APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing.
D. Install roofing membrane cap -sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane
roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkway Pads: Install walkway pads in cold - applied adhesive, using units of size indicated or, if not
indicated, of manufacturer's standard size according to walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07551
APP - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07551 -6
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.
2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed low -slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed steep -slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations,
expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field- assembled work.
I. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim,
including pattern of scants, tennination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion joint
covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each finish specified.
D. Maintenance data.
E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including built -in gutter, fascia, fascia trim, and apron flashing
approximately 48" long, including supporting construction cleats, seams,
attachments, underlaymew, and accessories.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory- applied
finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
N
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620- 1
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish
required, with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil- Coated Finishes:
a. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70
percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
2. Color: Dark bronze, to match sheet metal roofing.
C. Metallic- Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip process and
prepainted by the coil- coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1. Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 6531A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation;
structural quality.
2. Aluminum -Zinc Alloy- Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating
designation, Grade 40 (Class AZM 150 coating designation, Grade 275); structural quality.
3. Exposed Coil- Coated Finish:
a. Three -Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 '
percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coal and clear topcoat.
4. Color: Dark bronze, to match sheet metal roofing.
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self - Adhering, High - Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to I.0 mm) thick, consisting of
slip - resisting polyethylene- fhn top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS- modified asphalt adhesive,
with release -paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg Q.
2. Low - Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg Q.
B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3 -lb /100 sq. ft. (0.16- kg /sq. m) minimum, rosin sized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators,
sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation
and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise
indicated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-2 I
z
1
fl
r
1
u
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self - tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary
sheet metal or manufactured item.
General: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws, gasketed, with hex - washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-
applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High - strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets suitable for metal being
fastened.
C. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal
gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
3. Fasteners for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum -Zinc Alloy- Coated Steel Sheet: Hot -dip
galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless
steel.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure - sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with
release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm)
wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and
use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.
E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two -part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam - cementing compound, recommended by
aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.
F_ Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1 187.
2.4 REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate
reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -
welded corners and junctions or with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as
reglet.
t
t
r "
P�
1
1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick or Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch (0.56 mm)
thick_
2. Finish: Mill, where not exposed to view.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and
- true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on
faces exposed to view.
B. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-3
L ION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than I inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed
within joints.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from
compatible, noncorrosive metal_
E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and
solder.
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant
unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.
G. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with
epoxy seam sealer.
p
ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other
accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm -) long sections. Furnish flat -stock
gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by
SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion joint
covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
I. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer.
B. Built -in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints, complete with end
pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm-
) long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer.
C. Downspouts: Fabricate downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from
same material as downspouts, and anchors.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required with closure flange trim to exterior, 4 -inch-
(100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm) beyond cant or tapered
strip into field of roof.
E. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of dimensions
and shape indicated complete with outlet tubes, exterior flange trim, and built -in overflows.
F. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials: concrete.
2.7
LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof -Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm -) long, but
not exceeding I 0 -foot- (3 -m -) long, sections. Furnish with 6 -inch- (I 50 -mm -) wide, joint cover plates.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm -) long, but not exceeding 10 -foot- (3 - -) long,
sections. Fabricate joint plates of saute thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-4
r
r�
I
1
1
t
t
11
1
1�
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder
or weld watertight.
2_8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through -Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96 -inch- (2400 -mm- ) long, but not
exceeding 12 -foot- (3.6 -m -) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (I50 mm) beyond each side of wall
openings. Form with 2 -inch- (50 -mm -) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous.
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4
inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 -inch- (50 -mm -) high, end
dams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1
1
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self - Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self - adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not
less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less
than 3 -1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with
provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not
rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing
and trim system.
I . Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams
with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners.
Bend tabs over fasteners_
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against
galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as
recommended by SMACNA.
Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating
where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
I SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
07620-5
t
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant.
Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets or
straps spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with
sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (1 5.24 m)
apart. Install expansion joint caps.
C. Built -in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for
thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
1. Install felt underlayment layer in built -in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under
felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying
course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses
at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment.
2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m)
apart. Install expansion -joint caps.
D_ Downspouts: Join sections with I -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately
60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between_
E. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low -slope roofs. Set in adhesive material
compatible with the roofing_
F_ Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set
to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under
roofing membrane.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6
t
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates,
install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene
sheet_
C.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement
joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of comer or
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than t inch (25 mm) deep, filled with
sealant concealed within joints.
D.
Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than I -1/4 inches (32
mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
E.
Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.
F.
Soldered Joints: Not allowed.
t
G.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with
installation of roof drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant.
Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets or
straps spaced not more than 36 inches (900 mm) apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with
sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (1 5.24 m)
apart. Install expansion joint caps.
C. Built -in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for
thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant.
1. Install felt underlayment layer in built -in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under
felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying
course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses
at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment.
2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet (15.24 m)
apart. Install expansion -joint caps.
D_ Downspouts: Join sections with I -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners
designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately
60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. in between_
E. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low -slope roofs. Set in adhesive material
compatible with the roofing_
F_ Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support scupper, set
to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under
roofing membrane.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-6
t
Ll
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
G. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor head rim I inch (25 mm) below
scupper or gutter discharge.
H. Expansion -Joint Covers: Install expansion joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated. Lap
uv joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
I A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal
manufacturers written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."
Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work
with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge
flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3 -inch (75 -mm) centers.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated.
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close- fitting collar with top edge
flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install
stainless -steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert
counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches
(100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with
sealant.
F. Roof - Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof - penetration flashing with installation of
roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that
penetrate roof.
1 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to
SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation
of wall- opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.
1
1
t
B. Through -Wall Flashing: Installation of through -wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit
Masonry Assemblies" and "Stone Masonry."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" and Division 4
Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies ".
D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to
extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A_ Clean exposed metallic- coated steel surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-8
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07720 — SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM
PART I GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Deck -mount snow fences.
B. Roof ladders & platforms.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07610 - Standing Seam Metal Roofing.
B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim_
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be installed, including model number, material, color,
finish and installation instructions.
C. Verification Samples: Two representative samples of each type of product to be installed.
D. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's engineered layout chart based on roof material, code ground snow
load, roof slope and sheathing thickness.
E. Manufacturer's Certification: Manufacturer's standard warranty stating in writing that systems and
layout have been engineered for project conditions and location and are suitable for use.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A_ Convene a pre - installation conference prior to commencement of field operations to establish
procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and
adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of layout and installation details.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
13 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results_ Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide Installer's two -year warranty on workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM -
O S S EM 07720 1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: TRA -MAGE Roof Accessory Systems, which is located at: 1657 S.
580 East P. O. Box 682 ; American Fork, UT 84003; Toll Free Tel: 800 - 606 -8980; Tel: 801 -756-
8666; Fax: 801 -756 -7891; Email: info(ctra- maee.coun Web: www.tra- Inage.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 SNOW FENCES
A. Mounting:
,
1.
Deck Mount, Single Pipe; Model: D -I H.
2.
Deck Mount, Two Pipes; Model: D -2HL.
3.
Deck Mount, Two Pipes; Model: D -2HH. For use in conjunction with TRA Snow
Brackets /Guards.
4.
Deck Mount, Three Pipes; Model: D -3H.
5.
Deck Mount, Four Pipes; Model: DAH.
6.
Deck Mount, Log Rail; Model: D -Log.
7.
Deck Mount, Timber Rail; Model: D- Timber.
8.
Rafter Mount, Two Pipes; Model: R -1.
9.
Tile Mount, Two Pipes; Model: T -1.
10.
Standing Seam Metal Mount, Single Pipe; Model: C -1.
1.
Standing Seam Metal Mount, Single Pipe; Model: C -2 -1.
12.
Standing Seam Metal Mount, Two Pipes; Model: C -2 -2.
13.
Z -Rib Standing Seam Metal Mount, Single Pipe; Model: C- 2 -1 -Z.
14.
Single Ply Roof Mount, Two Pipes; Model C -2 Single Ply.
B. Components:
I.
Pipe. I -inch (25 mm) diameter, IO -foot (3050 mm) sections, each section includes one union.
2.
Mounting Bracket: I/4 inch (6 mm) plate.
3.
Mounting Bracket: 3/16 inch (I Omni) plate.
4.
Material: Zinc plated steel
5.
Material: Fluoropolymer- coated steel.
C. Base Size:
1. Base Size: Standard.
2. Base Size: Extended.
D. Finish:
1. Finish: Kynar (Two -Coat Fluoropolymer) Paint.
2. Finish: Hot -Dip Galvanized.
3. Color: Dark Bronze.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A_ Do not begin installation until roofing work is complete in the area in which products will be
installed. I
B. If roof - covering materials are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding. ti•
3.2 SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Snow Fences: Install one row of snow fences at the eave over the plate line. Secure to the rafters.
Space supports every 2 feet (6 10 nun) or per manufacturer's recommendations. Add additional rows
according to m anti facturer's recommendations.
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM 07720 -2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Brackets for rafter- mounted snow fence shall be installed prior to roof sheathing.
3.3 ROOF ACCESS EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Roof Davits: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SNOW RETENTION SYSTEM
07720 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07811 — CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE - RESISTIVE MATERIALS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes concealed cementitious sprayed fire- resistive materials.
B. Related Section: Division 5 Section "Structural Steel ".
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each fire- resistive product specified.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of cementitious sprayed fire- resistive material certifying
that the products furnished comply with requirements.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: Provide reports from a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency engaged by Contractor.
F. Product Test Reports: Indicate that physical properties of proposed sprayed fire - resistive materials
comply with specified requirements based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency according to requirements specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article.
G. Research /Evaluation Reports: Evidence of sprayed fire - resistive material's compliance with building
code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer certified, licensed, or othcrwise qualified by
sprayed fire - resistive material manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to
install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell
its sprayed fire- resistive materials to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself
confer qualification on the buyer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing and inspecting agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work, as documented according to
ASTM E 699.
C. Testing of Fire- Resistive Materials: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor
or manufacturer according to the following requirements:
!. Sprayed fire - resistive materials are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable
classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE- RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 -1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Testing is performed on specimens of sprayed fire- resistive materials that comply with laboratory
testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire- resistive
materials.
3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting
agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning_ Include in test reports a full description of
preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens.
D. Testing for Compatibility and Adhesion: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to prepare
compatibility and adhesion test reports required in "Submittals" Article based on testing that complies
with the following requirements:
Testing for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory"
about coating materials.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of sprayed fire - resistive material from one source and by a single
manufacturer.
F. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire- resistive materials and assemblies identical to
those tested for the following fire- test - response characteristics per test method indicated below by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify packages
(bags) containing sprayed fire- resistive material with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
Fire- Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to fire- resistive designs listed in UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory," or in the comparable publication of another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for sprayed fire- resistive material serving as direct -
applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119.
Surface - Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed fire- resistive product required,
tested per ASTM E 84.
G. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in
40 CFR, Part 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section I, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers'
labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and fire -
resistance ratings applicable to Project.
B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard
materials whose shelf life has expired.
C. Store materials inside, under cover, aboveground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove from
Project site and discard materials that have deteriorated_
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply sprayed fire - resistive material when ambient or substrate
temperatures are 40 deg F (4 deg C) or lower, unless temporary protection and heat is provided to
maintain temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product
application.
CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE- RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -2
i
w
J
ii
1
r
r
1
� I
t
LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of sprayed fire - resistive material. Use
natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation until fire- resistive material dries
thoroughly.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed fire- resistive materials with other related work specified
in other Sections to comply with the following requirements:
I. Provide temporary enclosures for interior applications to prevent deterioration of fire- resistive
material due to exposure to unfavorable environmental conditions.
2. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire- resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur
daring construction operations subsequent to its application.
3. Do not apply fire - resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed;
prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire- resistive material.
4. Do not begin applying fire - resistive material until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other
items penetrating fire protection are in place.
5. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire- resistive
material until application of fire protection is completed.
6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire- resistive material has been
applied, inspected, tested, and corrections have been made to defective applications.
13 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor tinder requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by Contractor and cosigned by Installer, agreeing
to repair or replace sprayed fire - resistive materiais that fail within the specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, flaking, eroding in excess of specified
requirements; peeling; and delaminating of sprayed fire - resistive materials from substrates due to
defective materials and workmanship within the specified warranty period.
2. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's
maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and
approved during fire- response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable tinder
conditions of normal use.
C. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE- RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated in this Article
for material composition and physical properties representative of installed products.
B. Definitions: Cementitious Mixture as identified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in the latest edition of
the UL Fire Resistance Directory under category CHPX, Spray- Applied Fire Resistive Material.
C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain
designated tire- resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property
listed as follows:
CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE- RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Dry Density: 15 lb /cu. ft. (240 kg/cu. m) for average and individual densities regardless of
density indicated in referenced fire- resistive design, or greater if required to attain fire- resistance
ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605
2. Bond Strength: 150 Ibf /sq. ft. (7.2 kPa) per ASTM E 736.
D_ Fire -Test- Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed fire - resistive materials with the following surface -
burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 10 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 0.
3. Fungal Resistance: The fireproofing material shall be formulated at the time of manufacturing
with a mold inhibitor. Fireproofing material shall be tested in accordance with ASTM G -21 and
shall show resistance to mold growth for a period of 28 days for general use and 60 days for
materials to be installed in plenums.
E. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
Sprayed Fire - Resistive Material:
a. Pyrolite 15; Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Div.
b. Monokote Type MK- 6/1 +7; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn., Construction Products Div.
C. Cafco 300; Isolatek International Corp., Cafco Products.
d. Cafco BlazeShield 11; lsolatek International Corp., Cafco Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine whether they are in satisfactory condition to
receive sprayed fire- resistive material. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the
following:
1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and
construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign
substances capable of impairing bond of fire - resistive material with substrate under conditions of
normal use or fire exposure.
3. Objects penetrating fire - resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items,
are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will
interfere with applying fire- resistive material_
B_ Conduct tests according to fire - resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that
substrates are free of oil, rolling compounds, paints, primers and other substances capable of interfering
with bond.
C. Do not proceed with installation of fire - resistive material until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire - resistive material, including oil, grease,
rolling compounds, primers, and loose mill scale.
CE1\7ENT1TIOUS SPRAYED FIRE - RESISTIVE MATERIALS 07811 -4
1
t
�1
I
I+
4J
t
J
1
I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire- resistive materials during
application. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations, protect the
environment, and ensure maintenance of adequate ambient conditions for temperature and ventilation.
33 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with fire- resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application
procedures, and types of equipment used to convey and spray on fire - resistive material, as applicable to
particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire - resistance ratings indicated.
B. Apply sprayed fire- resistive material that is identical to products tested as specified in Part I in "Product
Test Reports" in "Submittals" Article, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, or other
materials and procedures affecting test results.
C. Extend fire- resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless
otherwise recommended in writing by fire - resistive material manufacturer, install body of fire - resistive
covering in a single course.
1
1
D. Spray apply fire- resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
3.4 INSTALLING SPRAYED FIRE - RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. Apply fire- resistive material in thicknesses and densities indicated, but not less than those required to
achieve fire - resistance ratings designated for each condition, and comply with requirements for thickness
specified in Part 2 "Cementitious Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials" Article.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform to sample and verify
thickness, density and bond strength of sprayed fire- resistive application in accordance with the
provisions of the following:
I . Thickness and Density: ASTM E 605.
2. Bond Strength: ASTM E 736.
3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove
material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean surfaces to remove evidence
of soiling.
B. Protect fire- resistive material, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage
resulting from constriction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or
deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
C. Coordinate application of fire- resistive material with other construction to minimize the need to cut or
remove fire protection_ As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fire - resistive material and
patch any damaged or removed areas.
D. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected.
END OF SECTION 07811
CEMENTITIOUS SPRAYED FIRE - RESISTIVE MATERIALS
07811 -5
SECTION 07841— THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PARTI - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes firestopping for the following:
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
I. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture - resistant
through- penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in .width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the Floor
loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flare- spread values of less than 25 and smoke -
developed values of less than 450, as deternined per ASTM E 84.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -1
1. Penetrations through fire- resistance -rated floor and roof construction including both empty
openings and openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
2. Penetrations through fire- resistance -rated walls and partitions including both empty openings and
openings containing cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
3. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing compartmentalized areas
involving both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.
4. Sealant joints in fire- resistance -rated construction.
1.02
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide firestopping systems that are produced and installed to resist the spread of fire,
according to requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases.
B.
F -Rated Through- Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with F
ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire -
resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C.
T -Rated Through - Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with T
ratings, in addition to F ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems
protect penetrating items exposed to contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas. T -rated
assemblies are required where the following conditions exist:
1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall cavities.
2. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside fire- resistive shaft enclosures_
3. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction containing doors required to
'
have a lemperanire -rise rating.
4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a 4 inch (100 mm) diameter nominal
pipe or 16 sq. in. (100 sq. cm) in overall cross - sectional area.
D_
Fire - Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with fire- resistance ratings indicated, as determined
per UL -2079, but not less than that equaling or exceeding the fire - resistance rating of the construction in
which the joint occurs.
E_
For firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not
deteriorate when exposed to these conditions.
I. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture - resistant
through- penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) or more in .width and
exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting the Floor
loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
F. For firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flare- spread values of less than 25 and smoke -
developed values of less than 450, as deternined per ASTM E 84.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -1
�I
LION SQUARE L OAGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product data for each type of product specified.
I . Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for each type of material to be installed.
2. Certification by firestopping manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) and are nontoxic to building occupants.
Schedule:
Indicate type of materials, installation methods, and relationships to adjoining construction for
each through - penetration firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and
kind of penetrating item.
Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing
compliance with requirements for each condition.
Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that
is applicable to each through - penetration firestop configuration for construction and penetrating
items.
C.
D.
E.
1.04
A.
Samples for Selection and Verification of Color: Architect reserves the right to require sealant color
samples for exposed areas.
Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified testing and inspecting agency
evidencing compliance of firestopping with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current
products.
Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience.
Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing
and inspecting agency is UL, Warnock Hersey, or another agency performing testing and follow -
up inspection services for firestop systems that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Through - penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814 tinder
conditions where positive furnace pressure differential of at least 0.01 inch of water (2.5 Pa) is
maintained at a distance of 0.78 inch (20 mm) below the fill materials surrounding the
penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements:
3. Through - penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
4. Through - penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through -
penetration firestop system designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory," by
Warnock Hersey, or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
5. Fire - resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested for fire- response characteristics
per UL -2079 tinder conditions where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01
inch of water (2.5 Pa), as measured 0.78 inch (20 mm) from the face exposed to furnace fire.
Provide systems complying with the following requirenments:
6. Fire - Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by reference to design designations listed
by UL in their "Fire Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and inspecting agency.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide firestopping that complies with the following requirements
and those specified under the "System Perfornmance Requirements" article:
THROUGH- PENFTRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07841 -2
7
t
1
r11
f
A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and
legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number;
shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are
outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates
and times on days preceding each series of installations.
B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction
until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each
installation.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEA9S 07841 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
7. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear classification marking of qualified testing and
inspection agency.
B.
Information on Drawings referring to specific design designations of through - penetration firestop
systems is intended to establish requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to
exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated systems require the Architect's prior
approval. Submit documentation showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or
exceeds that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E C.
Single - Installer Qualifications: Engage a single experienced Installer who is certified, licensed, or
otherwise qualified by the firestopping manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and
training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to
sell its firestopping products to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not in
itself confer qualification on the buyer.
D_
Provide firestopping products containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified
in 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
E.
Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that
designated through - penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements.
F.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division
1 Section "Project Meetings."
G.
Owner will employ and pay a qualified inspection agency to check installed firestopping systems for
compliance with requirements.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver firestopping products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and
legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number;
shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to
Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle firestopping materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are
outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost,
condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate firestopping per firestopping manufacturers' instructions by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Notify Owner's inspection agency at least 1 week in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates
and times on days preceding each series of installations.
B. Do not cover up those firestopping installations that will become concealed behind other construction
until Owner's inspection agency and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have examined each
installation.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEA9S 07841 -3
C
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the
substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field
experience_
B_ Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials
and to comply with "System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only components
specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency
for the designated fire- resistance -rated systems. Accessories include but are not limited to the following
items:
I . Permanent fonning/damming/backing materials including the following:
a. Semirefractory fiber (mineral wool) insulation.
b. Ceramic fiber.
C. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming materials to prevent leakage of
fill materials in liquid state.
d. Fire -rated formboard_
e. Joint fillers for joint sealants-
f. Temporary forming materials.
g. Substrate primers.
h. Collars.
i_ Steel sleeves.
C. Applications: Provide firestopping systems composed of materials specified in this Section that comply
with system performance and other requirements.
2.02 FILL MATERIALS FOR THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Ceramic -Fiber and Mastic Coating: Ceramic fibers in bulk form formulated for use with mastic coating,
and ceramic fiber manufacturer's mastic coating_
B. Endothermic, Latex Compound Sealant: Single- component, endothermic, latex formulation.
C. Intumescent, Latex Sealant: Single- component, intumescent, latex formulation_
D. Intumescent Putty: Nonhardening, dielectric, water - resistant putty containing no solvents, inorganic
fibers, or silicone compounds.
E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single- component, elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one side.
1 7 . Job -Mixed Vinyl Compound: Prepackaged vinyl -based powder product for mixing with water at Project
site to produce a paintable compound, passing ASTM E 136, with flame- spread and smoke - developed
ratings of zero per ASTM E 84.
G. Mortar: Prepackaged dry mix composed of a blend of inorganic binders, fillers, and lightweight
aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogenous mortar.
H. Pillows /Bags: Re- usable, heat - expanding pillows/bags composed of glass -fiber cloth cases fulled with a
combination of mmineral -fiber, water- insoluble expansion agents and fire- retardant additives.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -4
s
fl
J
1
t
LjoN SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Silicone Foam: Two - component, silicone -based liquid elastomer that, when mixed, expands and cures
in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
J. Silicone Sealant: Moisture - curing, single- component, silicone- based, neutral - curing elastomeric sealant
of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self - leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
e
I
Ll
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 L-XAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07841-5
K.
Solvent - Release - Curing Intumescent Sealant: Solvent - release- curing, single- component, synthetic -
polymer -based sealant of indicated below:
grade
1. Grade: Pourable (self - leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces
and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening
conditions.
2.03
FIRE - RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants
of base polymer indicated that complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section applicable to fire- resistive joint
sealants.
B.
Single- Component, Neutral- Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure- related Use
NT, and joint - substrate - related Uses M, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
C.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25; exposure - related Use NT,
and joint - substrate - related Uses M, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
D.
Single- Component, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Typc S, Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M, A, and
(as applicable to joint substrates indicated) O.
2.04
MIXING
L A.
For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's
directions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce
firestopping products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application
indicated.
e
I
Ll
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 L-XAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening
configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of firestopping.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07841-5
J
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to installing firestopping to comply
with recommendations of firestopping manufacturer and the following requirements:
I . Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint substrates and from penetrating
items that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.
2. Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from
cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will
remain exposed upon completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestopping materials_ Remove
tape as soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.
3.03 INSTALLING THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOPS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part i and the through- '
penetration firestop manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install forming /damming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in the position needed to produce the cross - sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings of designated through - penetration firestop systems. After installing fill
materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent '
components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through - penetration firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the
following results:
I. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items. ,
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.04 INSTALLING FIRE- RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in Part I, with ASTM C 1193,
and with the sealant manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce
the cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability and develop fire- resistance rating required.
C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
cross- sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum sealant movement capability.
Install sealants at the same time joint fillers are installed.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESI'OP SYSTEMS 07841-6 1
I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to the time skinning or curing
begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated or required to produce fire- resistance
rating, as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealants with sides of
joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting agency employed and paid by Owner will examine completed firestopping to determine, in
general, if it is being installed in compliance with requirements.
B. Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
C. Do not proceed to enclose firestopping with other construction until reports of examinations are issued.
D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace firestopping so that it complies with requirements.
3.02 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and joints as work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of firestopping products and of
products in which opening and joints occur.
B. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion_ If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs,
cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and install new materials to
produce firestopping complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07841
I I THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
07841 -7
I I SECTION 07842 - FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
LION SQUARE LODGE NOR'T'H
Vail, Colorado
PART l - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section_
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire- resistive joint systems for the following:
I. Floor -to -floor joints.
2. Floor -to -wall joints.
3. Head -of -wall joints.
4. Wall -to -wall joints.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For joints in the following constructions, provide fire- resistive joint systems that are produced
' and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and
other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly in which fire- resistive joint systems
are installed:
1. Fire- resistance -rated load- bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection -rated openings.
2_ Fire - resistance -rated non - load - bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection -rated
openings_
3. Fire - resistance -rated floor assemblies.
4. Exterior curtain -wall assemblies and fire- resistance -rated floor assemblies.
B. Fire Resistance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings and movement capabilities indicated, but with
assembly ratings not less than that equaling or exceeding fire- resistance rating of constructions in which
joints are located, as determined by UL 2079.
1. Load - bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time test.
' C. Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire - Containment Systems: Integrity and insulation ratings indicated as
determined by UBC Standard 26 -9 and UL 2079.
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For each fire- resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which
joints are installed and relationships to adjoining constriction. Include fire- resistive joint system design
designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that
demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.
FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07842-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that
is applicable to each fire- resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating
items.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire- resistive joint system, signed byproduct manufacturer.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From fire- resistive joint system manufacturer indicating the
following:
I. Materials forming joint substrates have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with fill
materials.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation
needed for adhesion.
F. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire- resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the
ICBO Evaluation Service.
G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire- resistive joint system.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire- resistive joint systems for each kind of joint and constiuction condition
indicated through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to fire- resistive joint system manufacturers,
for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect fill materials.
1. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of fill materials to joint
substrates_
a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during
installation.
2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, forming
materials, and miscellaneous materials.
3_ Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain fire- resistive joint system manufacturer's written instnctions for
corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
C. Fire - Test- Response Characteristics: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that comply with the following
requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
1. Fire- resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per ICBO ES AC30 and are qualified for
types of joints and joint movement capabilities indicated in a current Evaluation Report by the
ICBO Evaluation Service.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fire- resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages
with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-2
C
C�
r
L.
1.7
A.
B.
1.8
A.
B.
C.
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number,
shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
Store and handle materials for fire- resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire- resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire- resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates
are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
Ventilate fire- resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is
inadequate, forced -air circulation.
COORDINATION
Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire- resistive joint systems are installed according to
specified requirements.
Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire- resistive joint systems.
Do not cover up fire- resistive joint system installations that will* become concealed behind other
construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having
jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
for product selection:
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
3. Basis -of- Design Products: The design for each fire- resistive joint system is based on products
named in Part 2 articles. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named
products or comparable products by one of the following:
a. Fire - Resistive Joint Systems:
1) DAP Inc.
2) Firestop Systems Inc.
3) Hilti, Inc.
4) 3M Fire Protection Products.
5) United States Gypsum Company.
b. Perimeter Fire- Containment Systems:
1) Specified Technologies Inc_
2) United States Gypsum Company.
I FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
07842-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer based
on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components of fire- resistive joint systems, including forming materials, that are
needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part I "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only
components specified by fire - resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing
and inspecting agency for systems indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint
configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire- resistive joint systems to comply with
fire- resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of
fill materials.
2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with
fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer
using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire- resistive joint system from contacting
adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from
fire- resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire- resistive
joint system's seal with substrates.
INSTALLATION
3.3
A. General: Install tire - resistive joint systems to comply with Part I "Performance Requirements" Article
and fire- resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated.
B_ Install forming /packing /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials
during their application and in position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths required to
achieve fire ratings indicated-
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-4
H
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Install fill materials for fire- resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to
achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials that are approved in writing by fire- resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage
materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire- resistive
joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or
deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire - resistive
joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- resistive joint systems complying
with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07842
FIRE- RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to
this Section:
1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast -in -place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
C. Joints between metal panels.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.
e. Control and expansion joints in ceiling and overhead surfaces_
f Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast -in -place concrete stabs.
b. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
C. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Joints between different materials listed above_
e. Other joints as indicated_
3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
C. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and
elevator entrances.
d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
C. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
f Isolation joints in cast -in -place concrete slabs.
g. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
h. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.
i. Control and expansion joints in the flooring.
j. Other joints as indicated.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A_ Provide exterior elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous
joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant
continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.
I JOINT SEALANTS
07920-1
II
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
,
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each joint - sealant product indicated.
,
B.
Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the
standard range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
'
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2-
f
inch- (I3 -mm -) wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) long strips of material matching the
appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience.
,
E.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements,
based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
,
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Application shall be done by a Joint Sealant Subcontractor with five years
,
experience. Submit documentation to the Architect and Owner
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.
C.
Manufacturer Technical Assistance: Materials shall be supplied by manufacturer who will provide
qualified technical assistance at the Project site.
D.
Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a
'
qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36 -month period.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
,
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 545.
2. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to
ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.
3. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard
'
specifications and test methods.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating
is
x
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
'
B.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
I. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant
'
manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
'
JOINT
SEALANTS 07920-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint - Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Submit 2 copies of written 2 -year special warranty agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail
to perform as airtight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance,
weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, or general durability; or appear in any
other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the
material for the exposure indicated.
B. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace
elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer
agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
I. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I. Tremco Manufacturing.
2. Dow Corning.
3. General Electric.
4. Pecora Corporation.
5. Maneco International.
6. Sika Corporation.
7. Sonneborn Building Products.
' 2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one
' another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2.03 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each
liquid - applied chemically curing sealant.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-3
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric
Joint - Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion
under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the
joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of
ASTM C 920 for uses indicated.
C. Stain - Test - Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified in the Elastomeric Joint -
Sealant Schedule to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
D. Interior Silicone Rubber Sealant:
1. Silicone rubber -base, one -part elastomeric sealant, complying ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25,
Grade NS.
2. Use acid -type for non - porous joint surfaces, and non -acid type where one or both joint surfaces
are porous.
3. For wet areas use type compounded specifically for mildew resistance.
4. Use for interior joints between equipment or countertops and walls.
Two - Component Polyurethane Sealant:
I. Polyurethane- based, 2 -part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25,
Grade NS (non -sag), Tremco "Dymeric ", Pecora "Dynatrol 11."
2. Optional Sealant: Contractor may, as an option, provide 1- component silicone sealant, "Silpruf'
by General Electric or #790 by Dow- Coming in lieu of above.
3. For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self -
leveling), Tremco "Dymeric ", Pecora "Urexpan NR- 200."
F. Exterior Sealant:
Two - Component Polyurethane: Polyurethane- based, 2 -part elastomeric sealant, complying with
ASTM C920 Type M, Class 25, Grade NS (non -sag), Tremco "Dymeric ", Pecora "Dynatrol Il."
One - Component Silicone:
a. Precast Concrete Surfaces: 4790 by Dow- Coming
b. Stone and Glass Surfaces: 9795 by Dow- Coming
For exterior and interior sidewalk and floor joints, polyurethane as above except Grade P (self -
leveling), Tremco "Dymeric ", Pecora "Urexpan NR- 200."
2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product.
B. One - component Acrylic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion sealant, one -part, mildew resistant and paintable,
complying with ASTM C834, recommended by manufacturer for general use as an exposed building
construction sealant, Pecora AC -20.
2.05 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in
the Acoustical Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag,
paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-4
1
t
t
Ll
I
t
1
t
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to
ASTM E 90.
B_ Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic - rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior
concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
I C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, acoustical sealants that may be
incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
'
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
a)
PL Acoustical Sealant; ChemRex, Inc.; Contech Brands.
b)
AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp.
C)
SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co.
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a)
BA -98; Pecora Corp.
b)
Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco, Inc.
2.06 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A_ Preformed Silicone - Sealant System: For each product of this description indicated in the Preformed
Joint - Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard system consisting of
precured low- modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral -
curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.
' B. Preformed Foam Sealants: For each product of this description indicated in the Preformed Joint- Sealant
Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, impregnated,
open -cell foam sealant manufactured from high - densily urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying,
water- repellent agent; factory produced in precompressed sizes and in roll or stick form to fit joint
widths indicated and to develop a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified
by manufacturer; and complying with the following:
I. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible
with joint substrates and ocher joint sealants.
2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Density: Manufacturer's standard_
4. Backing: Pressure- sensitive adhesive, factory applied to one side with protective wrapping.
2.07 JOINT- SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type (fiat are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
i B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type indicated below and of size and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:
I. Type C: Closed -cell material with a surface skin.
2. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin.
3. Type: Any material indicated above_
' JOINT SEALANTS
07920-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with
ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down
to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape
to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
D. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint - filler materials or joint surfaces at back of
joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self - adhesive tape where applicable.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and
sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint
substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of
sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent
to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatistactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with
joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
I. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint
sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease,
waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning
operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint
surfaces include the following:
It. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
C. Unglazed surfaces ofceramic tile.
3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-6
1
1
t
t
t
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm
substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
C. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer.
Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas
of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces
that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
t 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1 193 for use of joint sealants
as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated_
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for rise of
joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required
to produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings_
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace
them with dry materials.
E. Install bond- breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back
ofjoints.
F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are
installed:
I . Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,
tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
I . Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces.
3. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints_
H. Installation of Preformed Silicone- Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.
JOINT SEALANTS
07920-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Apply a bead of silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with
preformed silicone- sealant system manufacturer's printed schedule and covering a bonded area of
not less than a 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead inside of masking tape by 1/4 inch
(6 mm).
3_ Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion
and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between
sealant and both extrusion and substrate.
4. Complete installation of horizontal joints before installing vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over
horizontal joints. At end of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife_
Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing
protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, to produce seal continuity at ends, turns,
and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant
requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant to comply with sealant manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which
joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration
or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with
repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work_
END OF SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS 07920-8
1
C1
1
d
1
t
t
r
ri
11
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08110 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART I — GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES
1. Work under this section comprises of furnishing hollow metal doors and frames, including transom
frames, sidelight and window frames with provision for glazed, paneled or louvered openings, fire
labeled and non - labeled, as scheduled.
B. RELATED DOCUMENTS
1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.
C. RELATED SECTIONS
I . 06200 — Finish Carpentry
2. 08210 — Flush Wood Doors
3. 08710 — Finish Hardware
4. 08810 — Glass and Glazing
5. 09900 — Painting
1.02 REFERENCES
A. STANDARDS
I. NFPA -80 -1995 — Fire Doors and Windows
2. ANSI /SDI - 100 -98 — Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors an Frames
3. SDI - 105 -91 — Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames
4. SDI - 107 -78 — Hardware on Steel Doors (reinforcement application)
5. ANSI- A250.4 -1994 — Steel Doors and Frames Physical Endurance
6. ULI OC - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
B. CODES
1. NFPA- 101 -1994 — Life Safety Code
2. IBC 2003 —International Building Code
3. ANSI-Al 17.1 —Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities
4. ADA —Americans with Disabilities Act
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Submit copies of the hollow metal door and frame shop drawings in accordance with Division 1,
General Requirements.
B. PRODUCT DATA
I. Submit shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include
details of each frame type, elevations of door and frame types, conditions at openings, details of
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-1
I'
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH ,
Vail, Colorado
construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware reinforcements, and
details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. SHOP DRAWINGS
1. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and door openings as I
those on the contract documents. Shop drawings should include the following information:
a. Material thickness and /or gauge.
b. Door core material.
c. Mortises and reinforcements.
d. Anchorage types.
e. Locations of exposed fasteners.
f Glazed, louvered and paneled openings.
g. Mounting locations of standard hardware.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. SUBSTITUTIONS
I. All substitution requests must be submitted within the procedures and time frame as outlined in
Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his
consultant_
B. MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS
. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the Steel Door Institute (SDI.)
C. FIRE RATED DOOR ASSEMBLIES
1. All labeled fire door assemblies to be of a type that have been classified and listed in accordance with
the latest edition of NFPA80 and test in compliance with NFPA -252, UL -1013, and UBC -7 -2. A
'
physical label is to be affixed to the fire door at an authorized facility; embossed labels are acceptable
on standard 3 sided door frames.
2. For openings required to be fire rated exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit
manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to
design, materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction_
3. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S -label
requirements. Specifications must be cross - referenced and coordinated with hardware and other door
manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with ULIOC Standard for
Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7 -2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
a_ Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The supplier shall deliver all materials to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed unless '
agreed upon beforehand. Supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor.
B. Deliver doors cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and jobsite storage_ Provide
additional protection to prevent damage to any factory- finished doors. Mark all doors and frames with
opening numbers as shown on the contract documents and shop drawings.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-2 1
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage_ Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished
items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. Otherwise, remove and replace
damaged goods as directed.
D_ Store doors and frames at the building site in a dry and secure place.
1. Place units on minimum 4" high wood blocking_
2. Avoid use of non - vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber.
3. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately.
4. Provide ''/4 spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. All doors and frames shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance.
PART 11 - PRODUCTS
1 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Amweld Building Products, LLC.
'
2. Benchmark; a division ofTherma -Tru Corporation.
3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
6. Firedoor Corporation.
7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
8. Habersham Metal Products Company.
9. Kewanee Corporation (The).
10. Mesker Door Inc.
11. Pioneer industries, Inc.
12. Security Metal Products Corp.
13. SteelcraR; an Ineersoll -Rand company.
14. Windsor Republic Doors.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
All doors and frames shall be manufactured of commercial quality cold rolled steel per ASTM -A366 and
A568 general requirements or galvanized to A60 or G60 minimum coating weight standard per ASTM-
A924. Internal reinforcing may be manufactured of hot rolled pickled and oiled steel per ASTM -A569.
B.
Supports and anchors shall be fabricated of not less that 18 -gauge sheet steel, galvanized where galvanized
frames are used.
C.
Where items are to be built into exterior walls, inserts, bolts and fasteners shall be hot dipped galvanized in
compliance with ASTM -A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
D.
Rust inhibitive enamel or paint primer shall be used, baked on, and suitable as a base for specified finish
paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel
Surfaces on Steel Doors and Frames."
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado ,
E. Provide all hollow metal doors and frames receiving electrified hardware with ElectroLynx wiring harness '
and concealed plug connectors on one end to accommodate up to twelve wires. Coordinate ElectroLynx
connectors on end of the wiring harness to plug directly into the electrified hardware and the electric hinge.
2.03 DOORS ,
A. Provide 1 3/4" thick doors of materials and ANSI /SDI -100 grades and models specified below, or as
indicated on drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: Level 2, Model 2 — Seamless
a. Interior doors shall be minimum 18 -gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door
intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door.
1) Ceco: Regent- l8 -SEM
2) Curries:707N -18
2. Exterior Doors: Level 3, Model 2 — Seamless
a. Exterior doors shall be minimum 16- gauge steel with both lock and hinge rail edge of door
intermittently welded, filled and ground smooth the full height of door. Exterior doors shall be
insulated with a solid slab of expanded polystyrene or polyurethane foam permanently bonded to
the inside of each face skin. The top of all doors shall be closed flush by the addition of a 16-
gauge screwed -in top cap to prevent water infiltration.
1) Ceco: Legion -16 -SEM
2) Curries: 707N-16
B. All doors shall be beveled 1/8" in 2" and shall have top and bottom channels of not less than 16- gauge,
flush or inverted, welded to the face sheets. Doors shall have a full height 14 -gauge hinge rail
reinforcement channel, or individual 10 gauge hinge reinforcements.
,
C. All doors to conform to ANSI- A250.4 -1996 Level "A" criteria and shall be tested to 1,000,000 operating
cycles and 23 twist tests. Certification of Level °A" doors is to be submitted with approval drawings by
supplier upon request_ Do no bid or supply any type or gauge of door not having been tested and passed
,
these criteria.
2.04 FRAMES
A. Provide hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types
and styles as shown on the drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated.
I. Interior Frames: Level 2, 16 -gauge
t
2. Exterior Frames: Level 2, 16 -gauge
a. Ceco: SF Series
b. Curries: M Series
B. Fabricate frames with mitered and faces only welded corners, re -prime at the welded areas_ All welds to be ,
flush with neatly mitered or butted material cuts.
C. All frames shall have minimum 7 gauge hinge reinforcements, 14 -gauge lock strike reinforcing, and l2-
gauge closer reinforcing- y
D. Provide temporary shipping bars to be removed before setting frames.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4
t
t
t
1
[I
1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
E. Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive three (3) silencers on strike jambs of single frames
and two (2) silencers on heads of double frames.
F. Provide minimum 0.0179" thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where
mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle.
Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be
permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with
ANSI /SDI 100 requirements.
1. Clearances shall be no more than 1/8" at jambs and heads except between non fire rated pairs of doors
which may be no more than 1/4." Not more than 3/4" at the bottom of the doors_
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non -flush units, from only cold -
rolled steel sheet.
C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI -117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or
hot - rolled steel sheet.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exposed fasteners with countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed
screws and bolts.
F. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware
schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI -107
and ANSI -A 115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied
hardware may be done at Project site. Provide internal reinforcements for all doors to receive door closers
and exit devices.
H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware
Institutes (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames."
1. Provide glazing stops with minimum 0.0359 -inch- thick steel or 0.040 -inch- thick aluminum.
J. Provide non- removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass,
louvers, and other panels in doors.
K. Provide screw - applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass and other panels in doors
PART III - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as
specified.
I HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08110-5
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Comply with provisions of SDI -105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Door Frames," unless
otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders,
leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place
frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings.
2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge
jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors
and masonry T- shaped anchors.
3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb
adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and
secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices.
4. In metal -stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In steel -stud
partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
5. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
C. Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI /SDI 100. Install fire rated
doors with clearances specified in NFPA 80.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of
compatible air -drying primer
B. Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames.
END OF SECTION 081 10
1
1
C
1
1
1
1
C
1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-6 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior and interior stile and rail wood doors and sidelites.
B. See Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames.
C. See Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass vision panels in stile and rail wood doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.
C. Samples: For each species and finish required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard for Doors of Stock Design and Construction: Comply with WDMA I.S.6, "Industry
Standard for Wood Stile and Rail Doors."
B. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards."
C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Safety Glass: Provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201, for Category 11
materials, unless those of Category I are expressly indicated and permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product
selection:
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers
specified.
STILE AND RAID WOOD DOORS 08212-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites, including components, with wet -use adhesives.
B. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea - formaldehyde
resins.
2.3 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF STOCK DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Available Manufacturers:
. Artistic Doors and Windows, Inc.
2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
3. International Door and Latch.
4. IELD -WEN, Inc.
5. Maywood, Inc.
6. McPhillips Manufacturing.
7. QSM Doors, Inc.
8. Simpson Door Company.
B. Exterior Doors and Sidelites:
I. Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select.
2. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: as selected by Architect.
3. Glass for Openings: Uncoated, clear, insulating -glass units made from 2 lites of 3.0 -mm- thick,
fully tempered glass with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) interspace.
C. Interior Doors:
I . Grade for Transparent Finish: Premium or Select, solid core doors.
2. Wood Species for Transparent Finish: Alder.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for Project -site fitting.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C. Glazed Openings: Glaze doors at factory with glass of type and thickness indicated, complying with
Division 8 Section "Glazing."
D. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate panels to match adjoining doors in materials, finish, and quality of
construction.
E. Exterior Doors: Factory treat exterior doors after fabrication with water - repellent preservative to comply
with WDMA I.S.4. Flash top of outswinging doors with manufacturer's standard metal flashing.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop apply stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and First coat
of finish specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" to faces and edges of doors.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality
standard, and as indicated.
1 _ Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80.
B. Job- Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below;
do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware_ Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
I . Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8
inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold
is shown or scheduled, provide 114 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors.
2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors I/8 inch in 2 inches (3 -1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 -1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only
to extent permitted by labeling agency.
C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
END OF SECTION 08212
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08213 - METAL CLAD DOORS
PART I -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preassembled aluminum -clad wood frame door units, glazing and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AAMA/NWWDA 10l /I.S. 2 - Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood
Windows and GIass Doors; 1997.
B. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998.
C. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior
Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998.
D. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001.
E. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat - Treated Flat Glass - -Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
Uncoated Glass; 1997b.
F. ASTM D 2244 - Standard Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences From Instrumentally
Measured Color Coordinates; 1993 (Reapproved 2000).
G. ASTM D 4214 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint
Films; 1998.
H. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating
Glass Units; 1997.
1. WDMA I.S.4 - Water - Repellent Preservative Non - Pressure Treatment for Millwork; 2000.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
I. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
B. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing
manufacturer's full range of available colors and patlerns.
C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150
mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty for:
I. Wood Members: 10 years.
� I ME T LAD DOORS
� C
08213 -1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Aluminum Cladding Structural Performance: Lifetime.
3. Exterior Aluminum Finish: 20 years.
4. Insulating Glass: 20 years.
5. Other Components: 10 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Custom fabrications as indicated on drawings.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Pella Windows
2. Anderson Windows and Doors
3. Eagle Window & Door, Inc.
4. Eliason Corp.
5. Maiman Co.
2.2 DOORS-GENERAL
A. Doors: Complying with AAMA/NWWDA 101A.S. 2; factory assembled and glazed, complete with
weatherstripping, operating hardware and specified accessories.
1. Total Jamb Depth: As indicated on Drawings; provide factory installed jamb extensions.
2. NFRC certified thermal perfonmance.
2.3 CLAD WOOD DOORS
A. Inswinging Doors:
1. Style: As indicated on the Drawings.
2. Single Standard Doors: Rating HGD -LC45, maximum size 36 by 96 inches (915 by 2438
nim), standard door.
3. Jamb Depth: As indicated on the Drawings.
4. Top Rail Height: 5 -3/8 inches (136 mm).
5. Stile Width: 5 -3/8 inches (136 mm).
6. Bottom Rail Height: 12 inches (305 mm)_
7. Provide hinged screen; screen frame finish to match cladding; spring latch and door closer.
B. Outswinging Doors:
1. Style: As indicated on the Drawings.
2. Single Standard Doors: Rating HGD -LC60, maximum size 36 by 95 inches (915 by 2413
mm), with high performance sill.
3. Jamb Depth: As indicated on the Drawings.
4. Top Rail Height: 5 -3/8 inches (136 mm).
5. Stile Width: 5 -3/8 inches (136 mm).
6. Bottom Rail Height: 12 inches (305 mm).
C. Wood Frame and Sash Members: Select kiln dried wood, water and insect repellent and preservative
treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.4; wood members not fastened or adhered to cladding.
1. Wood Species: As selected by Architect.
METAL CLAD DOORS 08213 -2
t
t
L ION SQUARE L ODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Doors: Frames finger jointed, sash veneer - wrapped.
3_ Frame Comers: Block mitered, stapled, and sealed with silicone.
4. Sash Comers: Mortised and tenoned, glued, mechanically fastened, and sealed with silicone.
5. Interior Finish: Factory applied stain with clear polyurethane top coat; color as selected from
manufacturer's full line.
D. Cladding: 0.055 inch thick aluminum extrusions on both frame and sash, one piece in any one length;
with mitered comers mechanically fastened with corner locks and stainless steel screws; sash cladding
applied by sliding onto wood members, not fastened or adhered to wood.
r ,
I . Finish: Factory- applied Thermoset Kynar finish complying with AAMA 2605.
2. Frame Color: As selected from manufacturer's full line of standard colors.
3. Sash Color: Selected from manufacturer's full line.
4. Provide matching exterior trim in profiles as indicated on the drawings.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Screens: To match the windows as indicated in Division 8 Section "Metal Clad Windows'.
t
1
L - �
1
B. Glazing: Sealed insulating glass; glass of thickness recommended by manufacturer for size and
application; rated CBA in accordance with ASTM E 774.
Overall Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm), except 3/4 inch (19 mm) for doors, sidelights, transoms,
geometrics, and circle top windows.
Doors and Sidelights: Both lites fully tempered, complying with ASTM C 1036 quality Q3
and ASTM C 1048, Kind FT.
Tint: None.
C. Hardware Finishes:
Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware ".
D. Swinging Door Hardware and Weatherstripping:
Inswing Door Sill: Sloped extruded aluminum with interior oak threshold; with internal
drainage to exterior, top plate removable for cleaning.
2 Inswing Door Sill: Low -rise saddle type, extruded aluminum with thermmal break.
3. Outswing Door Sill: Bumper type, extruded aluminum with interior oak threshold,
compression weatherstripping on bumper.
4. Outswing Door Sill: Low -rise saddle type, extruded aluminum with thermal break.
5. Sill Finish: Bronze anodized.
6. Weatherstripping: High performance compression weatherstripping on frame stop; six finger
sweep weatherstripping on bottom of door.
7. Outswinging Doors: Provide extruded drip cap and flange.
8. Locks: Three -point concealed locking, all bolts operated by single mechanism; keyed deadbolt
with interior turn knob placed above handle.
a. Operation: Automatic locking upon closing door.
b. Operation: Manual activation of locking mechanism.
C. Provide U.S_ standard key cylinders keyed alike.
d. Provide U.S. standard key cylinders keyed differently.
e. Allow for U.S. standard key cylinder to be furnished by others.
9. Handles: Provide handles and trim plates both sides; style selected from manufacturer's
standard line.
10. Provide dummy trinm on inactive leaves.
11. Hinges:
a. Type: Commercial grade hinges.
METAL CLAD DOORS
08213 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
b. Type: Adjustable hinges, allowing vertical and horizontal adjustment.
C. Provide 3 hinges on each leaf up to 96 inches (2440 mm) tall.
d. Provide 4 hinges on each leaf 96 inches (2440 mm) or taller.
12. Hardware Finish: Coated finish selected from manufacturer's full line.
E. Interior Trim and Casings: Profiles as indicated on the drawings; same species as interior frame and
sash; finger jointing is acceptable for opaque finishing.
F. Structural Mullion Reinforcement: As indicated on the drawings or required to comply with local
code requirements; provide drip cap at horizontal zero mullions.
G. Metal Trim Accessories: Type and configuration as required to make a complete, weatherproof
installation; same finish as exterior frame.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result
for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instnictions.
B. After installation adjust units for proper operation, without binding, sticking, or racking.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch -up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08213
METAL CLAD DOORS 08213 -4
LION SQUARE DODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of access doors:
I. Wall access doors.
2. Fire -rated wall access doors.
3. Ceiling access doors.
4. Fire -rated ceiling access doors.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of access door assembly specified, including details of construction relative to
materials, individual components, profiles, finishes, and fire- protection ratings (if required).
I. Include complete schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction
details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of customized access doors and frames, including
details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, anchorage, and accessory items.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single- Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for the entire Project from one source and by a
single manufacturer.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame
assemblies tested for fire- test - response characteristics per test method as indicated below, and are
labeled and listed by UL, ITS (formerly Warnock Hersey), or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Test Method for Vertical Installations: ASTM E 152.
2. Test Method for Horizontal Installations: ASTM E 119.
C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturers standard size units, which may vary
slightly from sizes indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated in the work include the following:
I. Jensen Industries
2. J.L. Industries.
3. Milcor, Inc_
4. Bilco
5. Cesco Products
6. LarSCII'S Manufacturing Co.
ACCESS DOORS 08305-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 commercial- quality, cold - rolled steel sheet with baked -on, rust- inhibitive
primer.
2.03 ACCESS DOORS
A. Non- Insulated, Flush Mount Fire -Rated Doors: Self- latching units consisting of frame, trim, door, and
hardware, including automatic closer, interior latch release, and complying with the following
requirements-
1 . Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
2. Door & Trim: 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
2.
3. Hinge: Continuous piano type hinge_
X
4. Latches: Self latching tool -key or ring operated latch (as selected by owner).
Hinge: Concealed pivot type.
5. Fire - Protection Rating for Walls: 1 -1/2 hours.
4.
B. Flush Mount Access Doors: Units consisting of frame with exposed trim, door, hardware, and
complying with the following requirements:
Finish: Baked on prime coat (commercial grey).
6.
I . Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
2. Door: 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
3. Trim: Flange integral with frame, 1 inch wide, overlapping surrounding finished surface.
1.
4. Hinge: Continuous piano type.
5. Locks: Screwdriver- operated lock.
Door: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch
C. Drywall Flange -Flush Doors: Units consisting of frame with drywall comer beads on all sides, door,
hardware, and complying with the following requirements:
1.
Frame: 16 gauge cold rolled steel.
2.
Door & Trim: 16 gauge cold rolled steel with 28 gauge flange.
X
3.
Hinge: Concealed pivot type.
4.
Locks: Screwdriver- operated lock.
5.
Finish: Baked on prime coat (commercial grey).
6.
Packaging: Individually boxed.
D. Recessed
Access Doors and Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet.
1.
Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces.
2.
Door: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch
for gypsum board infill.
3.
Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (I.5 mm) thick sheet metal with drywall bead for gypsum board
surfaces.
4.
Hinges: Concealed pivoting rod hinge_
5.
Latch: Screwdriver- operated cam.
6.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Concealed Frame for Clean Drywall Finishes; Bauco plus Access Panel Solutions, Inc.
b. Access Door Type RDW; Karp Inc.
E. Sizes (unless otherwise noted within the construction documents):
I .
16 "x 16" - Hand Access
2.
30 "x20" - Person Access
ACCESS DOORS 08305-2 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.04 FABRICATION
A. General: Manufacture each access door assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.
B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Continuous welded construction. Grind welds smooth and flush with
adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to
types of supports indicated.
1. Exposed Flange: Nominal I inch wide around perimeter of frame.
2. For gypsum board assemblies, furnish frames with edge trim for gypsum board in accordance
with Drywall Flange -Flush Doors requirements within this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Advise Installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door installation, including
sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and
anchoring devices. Furnish inserts and anchoring devices for access doors that must be built into other
construction. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing access doors.
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with
adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Install concealed -frame access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces.
D. Provide the owner with all related access doors and frames hardware, keys, maintenance manuals and
warranties at lime of substantial completion.
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS 08305-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of manually operated overhead coiling doors:
1. Service door at Trash Room.
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports_
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire -rated and that exceed size
limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Fire- Test - Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
door and frame assemblies tested for lire -test- response characteristics per UL 10b and NFPA 252, and
that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1. Overhead Door Corporation
a. Security #600
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Interlocking slats in a continuous length for width of door of thickness and mechanical
properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door.
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc - coated (galvanized), cold - rolled structural steel (SS) sheet;
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
2. Slat type. Flat profile.
B. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard to suit type of curtain slats.
1. Astragal: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or
neoprene; as a cushion bumper for interior door.
C. Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain
curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide
adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
D. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at
opening head. Contour to fit end brackets. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness.
Provide closed ends for surface - mounted hoods, and provide fascia for any portion of between jamb
mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent
sagging.
I. Steel Door Hoods: Minimum 0.028 -inch- (0.7 -mm -) thick, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet that
matches slat steel.
E. Smoke Seals, if required for location: UL- listed and - tested smoke -seal perimeter gaskets.
F_ Weatherseals, if required for location: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-
stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use
1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.
I. Jamb Seals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) thick seals of'
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door jambs for a weathertight installation.
G. Push/Pull Handles: Galvanized steel lifting handles on each side of door.
I . Provide pull -down straps or pole hooks for doors more than 84 inches (2130 mnm) high.
H. Slide Bolt: Engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb
sides, operable from coil side.
1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel
shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease- sealed
bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members_
I. Mounting Brackets: Cast iron or cold- rolled steel plate.
J. Manual Door Operator: Push -up (lift- or pull -up) operation not exceeding 25 lbf (1 I I N).
2.3
FINISHES
A. Galvanized Steel Finish: Powder -coat finish.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 09331 -2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Color and Gloss: Manufacturer's standard Dark Bronze, to be approved by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and
head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports
1. Install fire -rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion, and
with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08331
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08332 — INSULATED OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of electric- motor - operated overhead coiling doors:
1. Insulated service doors.
B. See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
C. See Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door
components:
I. Wind Load: per structural drawings.
2. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to ASTM E 1886.
B. Operation -Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of
operating for not less than 20,000 cycles and for 20 cycles per day.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work.
C_ Samples: For each exposed finish.
D. Oversize Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire -rated and that exceed size
limitations of labeled assemblies.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
door and frame assemblies tested for fire- test - response characteristics per UL 106 and NFPA 252, and
that are listed and labeled for fire ratings indicated by UL, FMG, ITS, or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08332- 1
I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS '
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
1. Overhead Door Corp.
a. Rolling Service Door #625
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Interlocking slats in a continuous length for width of door of thickness and mechanical
properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door.
I. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc - coated (galvanized), cold - rolled structural steel (SS) sheet;
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.
2. Insulation: Manufacturers standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane -foam -type thermal
insulation complying with maximum flame- spread and smoke - developed indexes of 75 and 450,
respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely within metal slat faces.
B. Endlocks: Malleable -iron casings, secured to curtain slats to comply with wind load.
C. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard to suit type of curtain slats.
1. Astragal: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or
neoprene; as a cushion bumper for interior door.
D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Steel angles or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength to retain
curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide
adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
E. Hood: Form to act as weatherseal and entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at
opening head. Contour to Fit end brackets. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness.
Provide closed ends for surface - mounted hoods, and provide fascia for any portion of between jamb
mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent
sagging.
I. Steel Door Hoods: Minimum 0.028 -inch- (0.7 -mm -) thick, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet that
matches slat steel.
2. Exterior - Mounted Door: Fabricate hood with sealant -joint bead profile for applying joint sealant.
F. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Welded assemblies:
I. Steel: Minimum 0.064 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick, hot -dip galvanized steel sheet that matches door j
steel
G. Integral Sills: Integral part of frame assembly; fabricate of same sheet metal.
1 -1. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather - stripping gaskets fitted to
bottom and top of exterior doors, unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) thick,
replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of hood.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08332 -2
t
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Motor - Operated Doors: Combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
2. lamb Seals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8 -inch- (3 -mm -) thick seals of
flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at doorjambs for a weathertight installation.
I. Power- Operated Doors: Safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.
J. Automatic - Closing Device: Inoperative during normal door operations; with governor unit complying
with requirements of NFPA 80 and with an easily tested and reset release mechanism, and designed to be
activated by the following:
t. Replaceable fusible links with temperature rise and melting point of 165 deg F (74 deg C);
interconnected and mounted on both sides of door opening.
2. Manufacturer's standard UL- labeled smoke and heat detector and door - holder- release devices.
3. Building fire alarm and detection system and door - holder - release devices.
K. Counterbalancing Mechanism: Adjustable- tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel
shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to door curtain with barrel rings. Use grease- sealed
bearings or self - lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
1
1
1
1
1
I. Mounting Brackets: Cast iron or cold- rolled steel plate.
L. Electric Door Operator: Manufacturers standard type, size, and capacity for door and operation -cycle
requirements specified, with electric motor and factory- prewired motor controls, starter, gear- reduction
unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, remote - control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking
door, and accessories. Comply with NFPA 70_
1. Location of operator: Bench Mount, per manufacturer's specifications.
2. Remote- Control Station: Saflok, Inc. card reader at entry to garage located in median
pedestal.
3. Self - opening mechanism: magnetic perimeter sensor on garage side of overhead door.
4. Disconnect Device: Hand- operated for automatically engaging chain and sprocket operator and
releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting
timing of limit switch. Mount to be accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to
automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
FINISHES
A. Galvanized Steel Finish: Powder -coat finish_
t
Color: Dark Bronze, to match similar finishes on project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and
head molding strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports
I. Install fire -rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion, and
with weathertighl fil around entire perimeter-
' OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08332-3
I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain doors. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 08332
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08332-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08334 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Li RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes open- curtain overhead coiling grille located at West parking ramp of building.
B. Related Section:
. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling grille and accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
I. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method
of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.
2_ Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring_
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A_ Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 GRILLE CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Open - Curtain Grilles: Fabricate metal grille curtain as an open network of horizontal rods, spaced at
regular intervals, that are interconnected with vertical links, which are formed and spaced as indicated
and are free to rotate on the rods.
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 09334- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, finished to match grille.
Astragal: Equip each grille bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible
gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.
Provide motor - operated grilles with combination bottom astragal and sensor edge.
C. Grille Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard shape having curtain groove with return lips or bars
to retain curtain. Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal -to -metal contact and to
minimize operational noise; with removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
Removable Posts and Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard.
2.2 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening
head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for
stiffness. Form closed ends for surface - mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between -jamb
mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to
prevent sagging.
B. Mounting Frame: Manufacturer's standard mounting frame designed to support grille; factory fabricated
from ASTM A 36/A 36M structural -steel tubes or shapes, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 123/A 123M;
fastened to floor and structure above grille; to be built into wall construction; and complete with anchors,
connections, and fasteners.
C. Push /Pull Handles: Equip each push -up- operated or emergency- operated grille with lifting handles on
each side of grille, finished to match grille, where required for emergency egress operation.
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance grilles by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable -
tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel
connected to top of curtain with barrel rings_ Use grease - sealed bearings or self - lubricating graphite
bearings for rotating members.
B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold - rolled steel plate.
2.4 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS
A. General: Electric grille operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by grille
manufacturer for grille and operation- cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-
prewired motor controls, starter, gear - reduction unit, solenoid- operated brake, clutch, remote - control
stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking grille, and accessories required for proper operation.
Comply with NFPA 70.
Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with
NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24 V, ac or dc.
B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of
cycles per hour indicated for each grille.
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334-2
s
t
t
s
I
1 LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Electric Motors: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
' efficiency requirements specified in Division 1 l Section "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment"
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrical Characteristics:
2. Motor Type and Controller: Reversible motor and controller (disconnect switch) for motor
exposure indicated.
3. Motor Size: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and
operate grille in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in. /sec. (203 mm/s)
and not more than 12 in. /sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.
4. Operating Controls, Controllers (Disconnect Switches), Wiring Devices, and Wiring:
Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
D. Obstruction Detection Device: Equip motorized grille with indicated external automatic safety sensor
capable of protecting full width of grille opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses
downward grille travel.
1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in grille
opening without contact between grille and obstruction.
2. Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted
to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control circuit using
manufacturer's standard take -up reel or self - coiling cable.
E. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered grille with capability for emergency
manual operation Design manual mechanism so required force for grille operation does not exceed 30
lbf(133 N).
F. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand - operated disconnect mechanism for
automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while
disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from
floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency
operator is engaged_
G. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit- switch adjustment
and without affecting emergency manual operation.
H. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with regulatory
requirements for accessibility.
1. Emergency- Egress Release: Flush, wall - mounted handle mechanism, for ADA- ABA - compliant egress
feature, not dependent on electric power. The release allows an unlocked grille to partially open without
affecting limit switches to permit passage, and it automatically resets motor drive upon return of handle to
original position.
J. Self - Opening Mechanism: Automatic release mechanism triggered by smoke detector, emergency push-
button station, fire alarm or power failure_ When activated, the grille self opens by means of a fail -safe
operator to the fully open position without the need of power operation or battery backup systems. When
the emergency push- button is reset, and the alarm is cleared and power is restored, the grille will operate
normally.
I OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
08334-3
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334-4
t
s
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.5
OPEN - CURTAIN GRILLE ASSEMBLY
A.
Open - Curtain Grille: Overhead coiling grille with a curtain having a network of horizontal rods that
'
interconnect with vertical links.
B.
Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
,
of the following:
t
1. Overhead Door Corporation
F
a. Security Grille 4670
C.
Operation Cycles: Not less than 10,000.
s
D.
Grille Curtain Material: Aluminum.
I. Space rods at approximately 2 inches (51 mm) o.c.
2. Spacers: Metal tubes matching curtain material.
E.
Curtain Jamb Guides: Aluminum or Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.
Provide continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal -to -metal contact and to minimize operational
noise.
F.
Hood: Match curtain material and finish.
G_
Electric Grille Operator:
Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 60 cycles per hour_
2. Emergency Manual Operation: Push -tip type.
3. Obstruction- Detection Device: Automatic photoelectric sensor or electric sensor edge on bottom
bar.
4. Bench Mount Operator, per manufacturers specifications.
4'
5. Remote- Control Station: Sallok, Inc. card reader at entry to garage located in median
pedestal.
6. Self-opening mechanism: magnetic perimeter sensor on garage side of overhead door.
7. Other Equipment: Audible and visual signals, Emergency - egress release.
1-1.
Grille Finish:
3
s
1. Aluminum Finish: Dark bronze anodized to match Kynar colors in project.
1
PART 3-
EXECUTION
a
3.1
INSTALLATION
1
A.
Install overhead coiling grilles and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors,
inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as
specified.
B.
Adjust hardware and moving pans to function smoothly so that grilles operate easily, free of warp, cvvist,
or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain overhead coiling grilles.
END OF SECTION 08334
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 08334-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08361 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY 0
A. This Section includes electrically operated sectional overhead doors.
B. See Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for powered operators and accessories.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door
components:
I. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 Ibf /sq. ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and
outward.
2. Air Infiltration: Maximum Rate: 0.08 cfm (0.038 L /s) at 15 mph (24 km/h).
3. Impact Test for Flying Debris: Comply with ASTM E 1996, tested according to ASTM E 1886.
B. Operation -Cycle Requirements: Provide sectional overhead door components and operators capable of
operating for not less than 10,000 cycles.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory.
B_ Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not detailed in manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturers authorized representative who is trained and approved for both
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B_ Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
SECTIONAL OVER]-IEAD DOORS 08361 - I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1. Steel Doors with Insulated Steel Panels:
a.
Amarr Garage Doors.
b.
Arm- R -Lite.
C.
Clopay Building Products Company; a Griffon Company.
d.
Fimbel Door Corporation.
e.
General American Door Company.
f.
Haas Door, a Nofziger Company.
g.
Martin Door Manufacturing.
h.
Overhead Door Corp.
i_
Raynor.
j.
Wayne - Dalton Corp.
k.
Windsor Door; a MAGNATRAX Corporation.
2. Aluminum Doors with Insulated Panels:
a.
Fimbel Door Corporation.
b.
Haas Door; a Nofziger Company_
3. Aluminum Doors with Fiberglass Panels:
a.
Arm- R -Lite.
b.
Fimbel Door Corporation.
C.
Overhead Door Corp.
d.
Rasco Industries, Inc_
e.
Wayne - Dalton Corp.
f.
Windsor Door; a MAGNATRAX Corporation.
STEEL DOOR SECTIONS
Construct door sections including face sheets and frames from zinc- coated (galvanized), cold - rolled,
commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z130) coating designation.
Fabricate door panels from a single sheet to provide sections not more than 24 inches (600 mm) high and
nominally 2 inches (51 mm) deep.
1. For Insulated Doors: Thermal -break constriction.
Enclose open sections with channel end stiles formed from not less than 0.064 -inch- (1.6 -mm -) thick
galvanized steel sheet and weld end stiles to door section in place.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle complying with bottom- section profile and
allowing installation of astragal.
Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.
Thermal Insulation: Insulate inner core of steel sections with door manufacturer's standard polystyrene or
polyurethane insulation. Enclose insulation completely within steel sections that incorporate the
following inside facing material, with no exposed insulation material evident:
1. Inside Facing Material: Zinc - coated (galvanized) steel sheet.
2. Inside Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard prefinished hardboard panel.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08361 -2
s
s
fl
C
r
r
u
u
[1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
G. Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned, with tight hairline joints and free of
warp, twist, and deformation.
H. Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants.
a. Pretreat zinc- coated steel, after cleaning, with a conversion coating.
2. Apply manufacturer's standard primer and powder -coat finish to interior- and exterior -door faces
after forming.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS
A. Construct door sections with extruded- aluminum shapes, complying with ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221 M), alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and
finish indicated. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed stainless -steel through bolts, full
height of door section. Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight -seal joint. Provide reinforcement
for hardware attachment.
B. Fabricate panels of aluminum sheet not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, set in continuous vinyl
channel retained with rigid, snap -in, extruded -vinyl moldings or with rubber or neoprene glazing gasket
with aluminum stop.
C. Class 11, Color Anodic Finish: Dark Bronze.
2.4 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized steel track system, sized for door size and weight, designed
for lift type indicated and clearances shown, including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement for rigid
support of ball- bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Weld or bolt to track supports.
I . Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel supporting members to provide strength and
rigidity during opening and closing of doors_
B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather - stripping gaskets of flexible
vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of overhead door.
. Provide motor- operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.
2. Provide continuous flexible seals at doorjambs for a weathertight installation.
C_ Windows: Type and size indicated and in arrangement shown_
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide heavy -duty, corrosion- resistant hardware to suit door type.
B. Hinges: Heavy -duty galvanized steel hinges at each end stile and at each intermediate stile. Attach
hinges to door sections through stiles and rails. Provide double -end hinges where required and for doors
exceeding 16 feet (4.37 m) in width.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -3
t
l
2.6
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
rs: Heavy -duty rollers with steel ball bearings in case - hardened steel races.
Tire Material: Case - hardened steel.
)r unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is
locked.
COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM
A. Torsion Spring: Fabricated from oil - tempered -steel wire, mounted on a cross - header tube or steel shaft.
Connect to door with galvanized aircraft -type lift cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1.
Provide springs calibrated for a minimum of 10,000 cycles.
B. Cable Drums: Cast - aluminum or gray -iron casting cable drums grooved to receive cable. Mount
counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball- bearing brackets at each end of shaft.
C. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring- loaded, steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller
assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks.
D. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wail and to
level shaft and prevent sag.
E. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
2.7
ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by
door manufacturer for door and operation -cycle requirements specified, and accessories required for
proper operation.
B. Disconnect Device: Hand - operated disconnect device for automatically engaging chain - and - sprocket
operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without
affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect device and operator so they are accessible from floor
level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator
is engaged.
C. Provide control equipment, maximum 24 -V, ac or dc_
D. Door - Operator Type: Unit consisting of electric motor, trolley or drawbar type, and floor -level quick
release for manual operation.
E. Electric Motors: High - starting torque, reversible, continuous -duty, with overload protection, sized to
start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position.
I. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical
system.
F. Obstruction Detection Device: Automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening.
Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.
G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door
at frilly opened and fully closed positions.
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08361 -4
i
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
H_ Door Operator: card key system, mounted to exterior pole at average window height of approaching
vehicle on driver's side_
I. Obstruction Detection Device: Automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening.
Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.
J. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door
at fully opened and fully closed positions.
K. Exiting Trigger: Magnetic sensor, mounted below surface of concrete slab at building interior.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware according to
Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and as specified.
3.2 STARTUP SERVICES
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to perform startup services.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion and
with weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
B. Touch -up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized track to track supports, clean field welds and
abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,
operate, and maintain sectional overhead doors. Refer to Division I Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 08361
SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior and interior, sliding, power - operated automatic entrances.
a. Card - Reader access at East doors: Sallock or approved equal.
b. Automatic access at West doors.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Windbome- Debris - Impact- Resistance -Test Performance: Provide automatic entrances that pass small
missile- impact and cyclic - pressure tests of ASTM E 1996 according to the IBC.
B. Opening -Force Requirements:
I . Power- Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if
power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width.
2. Breakaway Device for Power- Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required for a
breakaway door or panel to open.
C. Entrapment Force Requirements:
I. Power- Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door
from closing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting
heights, and attachments to other work.
I . Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
2. Activation and safety devices.
3. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.
C. Sample: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
D. Product certificates.
E. Product test reports.
F. Field quality- control reports.
G. Maintenance data.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Power- Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
E. Emergency -Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for
automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.
1.5
WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of automatic entrances that fait in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
I . Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes within specified warranty
period.
I . Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A_ Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated_
1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant primer complying with SSPC -PS
Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface
preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC -SP COM and prepare surfaces according to
applicable SSPC standard.
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold- Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M.
3. Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011 /A 1011 M.
C. Stainless -Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Stainless -Steel Tubing. ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
' E_ Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
F. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage - Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout;
complying with ASTM C 1 107; of consistency suitable for application.
' H. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied, asphalt - mastic paint complying with SSPC -Paint 12 requirements,
except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 -mil (0.76 -mm) thickness per coat.
' I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites, framing,
' headers, carrier assemblies, roller (racks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories
required for a complete installation.
B. Sliding Automatic Entrance:
' I. Basis -of- Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Horton automatic
sliding storefront or comparable product by one of the following:
' a. Biparting - Sliding Units:
1) Horton Automatics; Div, of Overhead Door Corporation
a) Proslide Series 2003 Electric Belt Drive Operator
2. Configuration: Biparting - sliding door(s), with transom and pocketed sidelite(s) as indicated on
Drawings.
a. Traffic Pattern: Two way.
b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaf (leaves) only.
C. Mounting: Between jambs.
3. Operator Features:
a. Power opening and closing.
b. Drive System: Chain or belt.
C. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
d. Adjustable hold -open time between 0 and 30 seconds.
C. Obstruction recycle.
f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.
4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier
assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin- covered, ball- bearing-
center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball - bearing- center steel wheels
operating on a nylon- or delrin- covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier
assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.
I AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-3
� I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball- bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each active
leaf.
5. Sliding Door Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and bottom - guide track
system, with stainless - steel, ball- bearing- center roller wheels.
a. Configuration: No threshold across door opening and recessed guide track system at
sidelites.
6. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence sensor.
7. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on side of door opening
through which doors travel, to detect obstructions and to prevent door from opening.
8. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with Class 11, color anodic finish matching
adjacent storefront.
a. Color: Dark bronze.
2.3
ENTRANCE COMPONENTS
A. Framing and Transom Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2
mm) thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
I. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062 -inch (1.6 -mm) wall thickness.
B. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125 -inch- (3.2 -mm -) thick, extruded aluminum and extending full
width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable
access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent
unauthorized access.
C. Signage: Affixed to both sides of each door as required by BFIMA A156.10 and BHMA A156.19 for
type of door and its operation.
Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process.
2.4
DOOR OPERATORS AND ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES
A. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and
movement; for condition of exposure; and for long - terns, maintenance -free operation under normal traffic
load for type of occupancy indicated.
I. Door Operator Perfonnance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain
them in fidly closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.
2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self - contained, overhead unit powered by fractional -
horsepower, permanent- magnet do motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear
train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid -state microprocessor
controller; UL 325; and with mamial operation with power off.
B. Combination Motion/Presence Sensors: Self- contained units; consisting of both motion and presence
sensors in a single metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions
required by BHMA A156.10.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 09460-4
!I
1
1
1
IJ
1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
Motion Sensor: K- band - frequency, microwave - scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than
2 to 10 seconds.
a. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection.
b. For one - way - traffic entrances, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are
fully closed.
2. Presence Sensor: Infrared- scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds.
Sensors shall remain active at all times.
C. Card Readcr: Saflock or approved equal, located at East doors as indicated on Drawings.
D. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender - receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not
be active when doors are fully closed.
E. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self - protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical
interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware
manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.
B. breakaway Device for Power - Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows door to swing out
in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Maximum force to open door shall
be 50 Ibf (222 N) according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of door operator while in
breakaway mode.
C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn, with
minimum 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) long throw bolt; BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1.
Two -Point Locking for Biparting - Folding Doors: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, mortise -type,
laminated -steel hookbolt mounted in stile of active door leaf that engages active leaf of opposite
door when operated by cylinder; and with concealed, vertical flush bolts mounted in each hinge
stile that engage header when operated by cylinders.
D. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
I_ Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon- fabric
or aluminum -strip backing.
2. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.
3. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door
bottom.
E. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket_
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated
and to comply with indicated standards.
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly,
finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado '
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed
loads and for installing hardware. ,
D_ Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.
E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing ,
indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final
finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-
installed hardware before applying finishes.
G. Activation and Safety Devices:
I. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of
door and direction of travel.
2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as '
follows:
a_ Top Beam: 48 inches (1219 mm).
b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches (6 10 mm).
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA- M12C22A32/A34, Class 11, 0.010 mm or thicker.
1. Color: Dark Bronze
,
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact
surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this
purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact
surfaces with bituminous paint.
B_ Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades
without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.
,
I. Install surface- mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location
with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within system to exterior.
4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.
,
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in
Division 16 Sections.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-6
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Access- Control Devices: Connect access - control devices to access - control system as specified in
Division 16 Sections.
E. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and functions
indicated.
F. Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10 including Appendix A and manufacturer's written
instructions unless otherwise indicated.
G. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
H. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to provide
weathertight installation.
I. Set guide track system, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
I. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and breakaway sidelight as required by referenced
door standards.
J. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with
no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use
lacing bars and distribution spools.
K. Inspection: Engage Installer's certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrances and prepare test
and inspection reports.
1. Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance to determine compliance of
installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.
2. Field Quality- Control Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and
Contractor within 24 hours after inspection.
3. Work will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
L. Adjusting: Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for
weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A 156.10.
I. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent
to 3 days' use by normal traffic ( 100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and
other moving parts.
M. Demonstration: Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,
and maintain automatic entrances.
END OF SECTION 08460
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08460-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08550 — ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS
PARTI - GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes aluminum -clad wood - framed windows.
B. Architect to select from manufacturer's full line of
1. Wood species and finish.
2. Insect screen composition and type.
3. Hardware selections.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide wood windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based
on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of test size
required by AAMA/WDMA l01/1.S.2/NAFS.
B. Structural Perfonnance: Provide wood windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following
loads based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass
AAMA /WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed
indicated in miles per hour (meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade, according to
ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2- Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade
indicated on Drawings.
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 tnph (40 m/s.
b. Importance Factor: 11_
C. Exposure Category: B.
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than
1/175 of glass -edge length or 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less, at design pressure based on
testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test
or structural computations.
Windborne- Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from windbome
debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those
specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 and requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of wood window indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work,
operational clearances, and installation details.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish_
' D. Product Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
E. Product test reports.
F. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace wood
windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or
condensation.
C. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of wood, metals, vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal
weathering.
e. Failure of insulating glass.
2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Metal Finish: five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Aluminum -Clad Wood Windows:
a. Marvin Windows and Doors.
b. Jeld -Wen, Inc.
B. Other Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Aluminum -Clad Wood Windows:
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Weathershield
b. Pella Corporation, Architect Series
C. Anderson Windows and Doors
d. Crestline; a brand of Peachtree Companies, Inc. (The); TPC Acquisition, Inc_
e. EAGLE Window & Door, Inc.; an American Architectural Products Corporation
Company.
f. Hurd Millwork Company.
g. Kolbe & Kolbe Millwork Co., Inc.
h. Marvin Windows and Doors.
i. Pozzi Custom Collection; JELD -WEN, Inc.
j. Sierra Pacific Windows_
2.2
BI:rY M IRI
A. Wood: Clear ponderosa pine (paint grade) or another suitable fine- grained lumber; kiln dried to a
moisture content of 6 to 12 percent at time of fabrication; free of visible finger joints, blue stain, knots,
pitch pockets, and surface checks larger than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) deep by 2 inches (51 mm) wide; water -
repellent preservative treated.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Rolled Aluminum for Cladding, High - Performance Organic Finish: Two -coat
thermocured system with fluoropolymer coats containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride
resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604.
1. Color: Dark Bronze
2.3
WINDOW
A. Window Type: As indicated in schedule.
B. Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2/NAFS.
. Performance Class and Grade: R20.
C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide wood windows with a whole- window, 1-1-factor maximum indicated at
15 -mph (24 -km/h) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to
NFRC 100.
1. U- Factor: 0.43 Btu /sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.5 W /sq. m x K) or less.
D. Solar Heat -Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide wood windows with a whole - window SHGC maximum of
0.50, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing
requirements applicable to glazed wood window units.
2.5 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight - fitting, removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to hilly integrate
with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide for each operable exterior sash or
ventilator.
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550 -3
L ION SQUARE LoDGc N ORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004.
Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable
PVC spline /anchor concealing edge of frame.
Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet with
minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.
C. Glass -Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18 -by -14 (1.1-by-1.4-mm) or 18 -by -16 (1.0- by- 1.l -mm) mesh of PVC - coated,
glass -fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch,
impact damage, and weather deterioration; in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate wood windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.
B. Weather Stripping: Provide full- perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator.
C. Factory machine windows for openings and for hardware that is not surface applied.
D. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors
for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for
movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide
mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units.
E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap -on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing"
and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows,
hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement,
anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent
construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points
of contact with other materials.
E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points
and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving
parts.
F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and
finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.
G_ Clean factory- glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written
recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08550-4
1
1
1�
t
t
1
I r_1
1
t
t
1
1
UOn SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during
construction period.
END OF SECTION 08550
IF
L
ALUMINUM CLAD WOOD WINDOWS
08550-5
1
1
1
1
t
1�
1
[J
1
1
SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
PARTI- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY:
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
A. Section Includes: Finish Hardware for door openings, except as otherwise specified herein.
1. Door hardware for steel (hollow metal) doors.
2. Door hardware for aluminum doors.
3. Door hardware for wood doors.
4. Door hardware for other doors indicated.
5. Keyed cylinders as indicated.
B. Intent of Hardware Groups
1. Should items of hardware not definitely specified be required for completion of the Work,
furnish such items of type and quality comparable to adjacent hardware and appropriate for
service required.
2. Where items of hardware aren't definitely or correctly specified, are required for completion
of the Work, a written statement of such omission, error, or other discrepancy to Architect,
prior to date specified for receipt of bids for clarification by addendum; or, furnish such items
in the type and quality established by this specification, and appropriate to the service
intended.
C. Allowances
1. Refer to Section 01210 for allowance amount and procedures.
D. Alternates
1. Refer to Section 01230 for Alternates and procedures_
1.02 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Comply with Section 01630
1.03 SUBMITTALS:
A. Comply with Section 01330
B. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to
ensure the "design intent" of the systemlassembly is understood and can be reviewed together.
C. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:
1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Wiring diagrams for each electric product specified. Coordinate voltage with electrical before
submitting.
4. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts with hardware schedule.
D. Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 6 complete reproducible copy of detailed hardware
schedule in a vertical format_
I . List groups and suffixes in proper sequence.
2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number.
3. Manufacturer, product name, and catalog number.
4. Function, type, and style.
5. Size and finish of each item.
6. Mounting heights.
7. Existing conditions as they relate to hardware.
I DOOR HARDWARE
08710-1
L
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
8. Explanation of abbreviations and symbols used within schedule.
9. Detailed wiring diagrams, specially developed for each opening, indicating all electric
hardware, security equipment and access control equipment, and door and frame rough -ins
required for specific opening.
E. Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and
others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing.
1. Templates, wiring diagrams and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical terms to
electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations.
F. Samples: (If requested by the Architect)
1. I sample of Lever and Rose /Escutcheon design, (pair).
2. 3 samples of metal finishes
G. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 01700 including specific requirements
indicated.
1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following.
a. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and
replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes.
b. Catalog pages for each product.
c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer.
d. Parts list for each product.
2. Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed ".
3. Copy of final keying schedule
4. As installed "Wiring Diagrams" for each piece of hardware connected to power, both low
voltage and 110 volts.
5. One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including
changing of cylinders.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Section 01440.
1. Statement of qualification for distributor and installers.
2. Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source responsibility.
3. Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experience in the distribution of commercial
hardware.
a. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardware Consultants (AHC) for the
purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule.
b. Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and signed by an AHC.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experienced in installation of similar hardware to
that required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.
Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide testing agency label or stamp on hardware for
labeled openings.
a. Provide UL listed hardware for labeled and 20 minute openings in conformance with
requirements for class of opening scheduled.
b. Underwriters Laboratories requirements have precedencc over this specification where
conflict exists.
6. Single Source Responsibility: Except where specified in hardware schedule, furnish products
of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware.
Ii_ Review Project for extent of finish hardware required to complete the Work. Where there is a
conflict between these Specifications and the existing hardware, notify the Architect in writing and
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-2
[1
1
1
1
i�
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
furnish hardware in compliance with the Specification unless otherwise directed in writing by the
Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Comply with Section 01700.
1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.
2. Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage.
3. Mark hardware to correspond with "reviewed hardware schedule ".
4. Deliver hardware to door and frame manufacturer upon request.
B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations_
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors
and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as
necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the
information on the Contract Documents.
B. Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made
for the proper installation of hardware.
1.07 WARRANTY:
A. Refer to Conditions of the Contract
B. Manufacturer's Warranty:
1. Closers: Ten years
2. Exit Devices: Three Years
3. Locksets & Cylinders= Three years
4. All other Hardware: Two years_
1.08 OWNER'S INSTRUCTION:
A. Instnict Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units.
1.09 MAINTENANCE:
A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed.
Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels_ Comply with
Division 1 Closeout Submittals Section.
1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of full -size units equal to 5% of amount installed.
2. Provide ten extra interchangeable cores for each masterkeyed group.
3. Special Tools: Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special
hardware component.
4. Maintenance Tools: Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware
component manufacturer.
5. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage
and protection of extra materials.
B. Maintenance Service: Submit for Owner's consideration maintenance service agreement for
electronic products installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:
A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance
with Division 1, paragraph 1.02 A.
Item:
Manufacturer
Approved
Hinges
Stanley
Hager, McKinney
Locksets & Cylinders
Best
Schlage
Cylinders
Schlage
Match Existing
Exit Devices
Precision
Von Duprin 99
Pulls
Rockwood
Hager, Burns
Closers
Stanley
LCN 4041/1461,
Norton 7500/8501
Stops
Rockwood
Hager, Burns
Overhead Stops
ABH
Rockwood, Sargent
Gasketing
National Guard
Reese, Zero
2.02 MATERIALS:
A. Hinges:
I . Template, screw hole locations
2_ Minimum of 2 permanently lubricated non- detachable bearings
3. Equip with easily seated, non - rising pins
4. Sufficient size to allow 180- degree swing of door
5. Furnish hinges with bearings
6. Provide hinge type as listed in schedule.
7. Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 30 inches in
height or fraction thereof.
8. Tested and approved by BHMA for all applicable ANSI Standards for type, size, function and
finish
9. Coordinate hinge size with pre -fab units and existing conditions.
10. ULIOB listed for Fire
B. Geared Continuous Hinges:
1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A 156.26 -1996 Grade 1
2_ Anti - spinning through fastener
3. ULI OB listed for 3 hour Fire rating
4. Non - handed
5. Lifetime warranty
6. Provide Fire Pins for 3 -hour fire ratings
7. Sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees
C. Cylindrical Type Locks and Latchsets:
1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI A 156.2, Series 4000, Operational Grade I, Extra -
Heavy Duty, and be ULIOC listed
2 Fit modified ANSI AI 15.2 door preparation
3. Locksets to have anti - rotational studs that are thru- bolted
4. Keyed lever shall not have exposed "keeper" hole
5_ Each lever to have independent spring mechanism controlling it
6. 2 -3/4 inch (70mm) backset
7. 9/16 inch (141 n i) throw latchbolt
1
1
L
t
1
1
Ll
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-4 1
F",
t
t
11
[
fl
1
1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
8. Outside lever sleeve to be seamless, of one -piece construction made of a hardened steel alloy
9. Provide locksets with Schlage C- keyway standard cylinders
10. Hub, side plate, shrouded rose locking pin to be a one -piece casting with a shrouded locking
lug.
IL Functions and design as indicated in the hardware groups
D. Exit Devices shall:
I . Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.3, Grade I
2. Provide a deadlocking latchbolt at all applications.
3. Non -fire rated exit devices shall have cylinder dogging.
4. Touchpad shall be "T" style
5. Lever design shall match lockset lever design
6. Provide strikes as required by application.
7. Fire exit devices to be listed for UL10C
8. UL listed for Accident Hazard
9. Aluminum vertical rod assemblies are acceptable only when provide with the manufacturers
optional top and bottom stainless steel rod guard protectors
E. Door Closers shall:
1. Tested and approved by BHMA for ANSI 156.4, Grade 1
2. ULIOC certified
3. Conform to ANSI 117.1
4. Maximum 2 7/16 inch case projection with non - ferrous cover
5. Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, and backcheck
6. Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blade stop spacers as required by frame and door
conditions
7. Mount closers on non - public side of door, unless otherwise noted in specification
Closers shall be non - handed, non - sized.
F_ Seals: All seals shall be finished to snatch adjacent frame color. Seals shall be furnished as listed
in schedule. Material shall be UL listed for labeled openings.
G. Key Control: Provide one wall mounted key cabinet complete with 50% expansion, hooks, index
and tags.
H. Silencers: Furnish silencers on all interior frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs. Omit where any
type of seals occur.
2.03 FINISH:
A_ Designations used in Schedule of Finish Hardware - 3.05, and elsewhere to indicate hardware
finishes are those listed in ANSI /BHMA A156.18 including coordination with traditional U.S.
finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products
B_ Powder coat door closers to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
C. Aluminum items shall be finished to match predominant adjacent material. Seals to coordinate
with frame color.
2.04 KEYS AND KEYING:
A. Provide keyed construction cylinders during the construction period.
B. Cylinders shall be equivalent to Schlage C keyway.
I DOOR HARDWARE
08710-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Permanent keys and: Stamped with the applicable key mark for identification_ These visual key
control marks or codes will not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys will also be stamped
"Do Not Duplicate_"
D. Transmit Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys to Owner by Registered Mail,
return receipt requested.
E. Furnish keys in the following quantities:
1 each Grand Masterkeys
4 each Masterkeys
2 each Change keys each keyed core
15 each Construction masterkeys
F. The Owner, or the Owner's agent, will install permanent cylinders and return the construction
units to the Hardware Supplier. Construction cylinders and keys remain the property of the
Hardware Supplier.
G. Keying Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting, and programming meeting with Architect Owner
and hardware supplier, and other involved parties to ensure locksets and locking hardware, are
functionally correct and keying and programming complies with project requirements. Furnish 3
typed copies of keying and programming schedule to Architect.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items and conditions under which
Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS:
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as specifically
indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
1. Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames, by the
Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).
2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install
surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb
and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper
installation and operation.
B. Conform to local governing agency security ordinance.
C_ ADA Standard: Conform to ANSI AI 17.1 for positioning requirements for disabled_
D. Installed hardware using the manufacturers fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw holes
located in metallic materials. Do not use "Riv- Nuts" or similar products.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT
1
1
t
1
1
t
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-6 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
A. Contractor/Installers, Field Services: After installation is complete, contractor shall inspect
completed door openings on site to verify installation of hardware is complete and properly
adjusted, in accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings.
I . Check and adjust closers to ensure proper operation.
a. Adjust closer to complete full closing cycle in less than 4 to 6 seconds without abrupt
change of speed between "Sweep" and "Latch" speeds.
b. Adjust "Backcheck" according to manufacturer's instructions.
c. Set exterior doors closers to have 8.5 lbs maximum pressure to open, interior non -rated at
5 Ibs, rated openings at 12lbs
2. Check latchset, lockset, and exit devices are properly installed and adjusted to ensure proper
operation.
a. Verify levers are free from binding.
b. Ensure latchbolts and dead bolts are engaged into strike and hardware is functioning.
3. Report findings, in writing, to architect and hardware supplier outlining corrective actions and
recommendations.
3.04 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE:
Manufacturer List
Code Name
AB ABH
AR Adams Rite
BE Best Access Systems
NA National Guard
PR Precision
RO Rockwood
SE Securitron
ST Stanley
Hardware Sets
SET #1
Doors: D005
3 Hinges
FBB179 4 1/2X4 1/2
642
ST
1 Lockset
93K- 7R14DS3 X SCH
613
BE
I Cylinder
23 -065
606
SC
I Overhead Stop
4000 Series
613
AB
3 Door Silencers
608
GREY
RO
SET #2
Doors: D003, D007, D009A,
D00913, D010, D01 I A, DO I I C, D 105, D 116,
D 122A, D306
3 Hinges
FBB1794 1/2 X 4 1/2
642
ST
I Lockset
93K- 7Dl4DS3 X SCH
613
BE
I Cylinder
23 -065
606
SC
I Closer
D3551
690
ST
1 Wall Bumper
409
613
RO
I Gasketing
2525 B
NA
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SET #3
Doors: D002, D006, DI 15, DI 19B,
D202, D208, D209, D305, D309, D310
3 Hinges
FBB168 4 1/2X4 1/2
1 Exit Device
2108 X 4908
1 Rim Cylinder
20 -022
1 Closer
D4551 S
I Gasketing
2525 B
SET #4 - ALUMINUM, ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D001, D008, D1 IOA
3 Hinges
FB13 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
I Magnetic Lock
82
1 Push Pull Bar Set
BF15747
1 Closer
D4550 EDA X DROP PLATE
1 Wall Bumper
409
NOTE: CARD READER AND POWER SUPPLY BY OTHERS.
SET #5 - OVERHEAD
Doors: D004, D 104, D 107
1 Padlock
PLIOOO SCHLAGE
SET #6
Doors: D01 l B
3 Hinges
FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 I/2 NRP
Coordinator
1672
1 Set Automatic Bolts
1842
1 Dust Proof Strike
570
1 Lockset
93K- 7D14DS3 X SCH
Cylinder
23 -065
2 Closer
D4551 S
I Gasketing
2525 B
NOTE: ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER.
642 ST
613 PR
613 BE
690 ST
NA
642 ST
SE
612 RO
690 ST
613 RO
606 BE
642 ST
BLK RO
613 RO
613 RO
613 BE
606 SC
690 ST
NA
SET #7 - PATIO DOORS
Doors: D 182B, D 184B, D 1 868, D 18813, D 19013, DI 92 B, D 19413, D 196B, D201 C, D211 B, D280B,
1328213, D28413, D28613, D288B, D290B, D292B, D294B, D301 A, D302A, D312B, D382B, D384B,
D386B, D388B, D39013, D392B, D394B, D401 A, D401 B, D401 C, D401 D, D403E, D405, D50 A,
D501 B, D506A, D506C, D601A, D602A, D602B, D602C, D602D
Passage Set 93KON 14D 613 BE
Deadlock 83TOKL 613 BE
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8
LioN SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
NOTE: REMAINDER OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER.
SET #8 - SLIDING PATIO DOOR
Doors: D 180B, D296B, D380B, D396B
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9
NOTE: ALL HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUFACTURER.
SET #9 - ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: DI 08A, D 182A, DI 84A, D 186A, D 188, DI 90A, D 192A, D 194A, D 196A,
D201 A, D211,
D280A, D282A, D284A, D286A, D288A, D290A, D292A, D294A, D296A, D301 B, D302, D304A,
D304B, D312A, D380A, D382A, D384A, D386A, D388A, D390A, D392A, D394A, D396A
3 Hinges FBB179 4 112 X 4 1/2
642
ST
1 Wall Bumper 409
613
RO
I Gasketing 5050 B
NA
I Auto Door Bottom 4447S
NA
1 Door KnockerNiewer 615
NOTE:
612
RO
LOCKSET BY OTHERS.
SET #10
Doors: 13101, D102
3 Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2X4 1/2
642
ST
I Privacy Set 93K- OL14DS3
613
BE
I Overhead Stop 4000 Series
613
AB
3 Door Silencers 608
SET #I
GR
RO
I - ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D 103 B, D 109
3 Hinges FBB 1794 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
I Closer D3551
690
ST
1 Wall Bumper 409
613
RO
I Saddle Threshold 425 DKB
NA
1 Gasketing 110 SDKB
NA
1 Sweep 600 DKB
NA
'
NOTE: LOCKSET BY OTHERS.
SET # 12 - ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D 103 A, D 117
3 Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
Closer D3551
690
ST
Wall Bumper 409
613
RO
3 Door Silencers 608
GREY
RO
NOTE: LOCKSET BY OTHERS.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SET #13 - EXTERIOR, ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D I I I A, DI 11 B, D 119A, D206
2 Hinges
FBB168 5 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
I Hinges
FBB168 5 X 4 112 54 6' LONG WIRES
642
1 Exit Device
E 2103 X V4908D
613
1 Cylinder
20 -022
613
1 Closer
D4550 S
690
1 Saddle Threshold
425 DKB
I Gasketing
110 SDKB
I Sweep
600 DKB
NOTE: WALL MOUNTED READER BY OTHERS_ 2 AMP POWER SUPPLY BY CARD
READER SUPPLIER.
SET # 14 - PUSH -PULL
Doors: DI IOB
3 Hinges
FBB179 4 1/2X4 1/2
642
1 Push /Pull
1 I OX70BX73CL TYPE 9 MOUNTING
612
1 Closer
D4551 HS DA
689
3 Door Silencers
608
GREY
SET #15 - EXTERIOR, ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D114
3 Hinges
FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
1 Power Transfer
EPT -5
I Exit Device
ELR 2403
613
1 Power Supply
ELR 151
1 Rini Cylinder
AS REQUIRED
613
1 Door Pull
BF 157
612
1 Closer
D4550 EDA X DROP PLATE
690
1 Saddle Threshold
425 DKB
I Gasketing
1 10 SDKB
I Sweep
600 DKB
NOTE: WALL MOUNTED CARD READER BY OTHERS
ST
ST
PR
SC
ST
NA
NA
NA
ST
RO
ST
RO
ST
PR
PR
PR
BE
RO
ST
NA
NA
NA
SET #16 - AUTOMATIC
Doors: D 121, D 122B
I Mortise Cylinder 20 -001 613 SC
NOTE: STANLEY AUTOMATIC OPERATORS FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY LOCAL
STANLEY DISTRIBUTOR.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-10
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SET #l7 - EXTERIOR, ALUMINUM
642
ST
93KON 14D
Doors: D124
BE
D3551
690
3 Hinges
FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
1 Lockset
MS1850S X 4066
313
AR
1 Mortise Cylinder
20 -013
613
SC
1 Push Pull Bar Set
BF15747
613
RO
1 Closer
D4550 EDA X DROP PLATE
690
ST
I Saddle Threshold
425 DKB
NA
I Sweep
600 DKB
NA
SET #18 - HOLD OPEN
Doors: D123
6 Hinges
FBB 168 4 1/2 X 4 1/2
642
ST
I Coordinator
1672
BLK
RO
I Set Automatic Botts
1842
613
RO
1 Dust Proof Strike
570
613
RO
Passage Set
93KON 14D
613
BE
2 Closer
D3550
690
ST
1 Gasketing
2525 B
NA
2 Mag Hold Open
2110
613
AB
NOTE: COORDINATE WALL
MAGNETS WITH ELECTRICAL AND FIRE ALARM PANEL.
ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MANUFACTURER.
SET #19 - ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: Dl 18A
3 Hinges
FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2
642
ST
Closer
D4550 HS DA
690
ST
3 Door Silencers
608
GREY
RO
NOTE: LOCKSET BY OTHERS.
SET 920 - HOLD OPEN
Doors: D 1 18B
3 Hinges
Passage Set
I Closer
1 Mag Hold Open
Gasketing
FBB 179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2
642
ST
93KON 14D
613
BE
D3551
690
ST
2110
613
AB
2525 B
NA
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-11
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
NOTE: COORDINATE WALL MAGNET WITH ELECTRICAL AND FIRE PANEL.
SET #21 - EXTERIOR, ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D120
6 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
2 Flush Bolts 555
613
RO
I Dust Proof Strike 570
613
RO
2 Closer D4550 HS DA
690
ST
I Saddle Threshold 425 DKB
NA
1 Gasketing 110 SDKB
NA
2 Sweep 600 DKB
NA
NOTE: LOCKSET AND DUMMY TRIM BY OTHERS. ASTRAGAL
BY DOOR
MANUFACTURER.
SET 422 — EXTERIOR, ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D201 B
3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
2 Closer D4550 HS
690
ST
1 Saddle Threshold 425 DKB
NA
I Gasketing 110 SDKB
NA
1 Sweep 600 DKB
NA
NOTE: LOCKSET BY OTHERS.
SET #23 - ACCESS CONTROLLED
Doors: D210, D303, D311, D402, D403A, D403C, D404, D406, D502, D503,
D504, D505
3 Hinges FBB 179 4 1/2X4 1/2
642
ST
1 Closer D3551
689
ST
I Wall Bumper 409
613
RO
1 Gasketing 2525 B
NA
NOTE. LOCKSET BY OTHERS.
SET 1124 - EXTERIOR, ROOF
Doors: D407
3 Hinges FBB179 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
1 Lockset 93K- 7D14DS3 X SCH
613
BE
I Cylinder 23 -065
606
Sc
Closer D3550
690
ST
I Overhead Stop 4000 Series
613
AB
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-12
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1 Gasketing
110 SDKB
NA
I Sweep
600 DKB
NA
NOTE: LOCKSET BY OTHERS. PROVIDE BULKHEAD THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED BY
ROOF FLASHING AND
CURB DETAILS.
SET #25 - EXTERIOR, ROOF
Doors: D403B
3 Hinges
FBB1794 1/2X4 1/2
642
ST
I Passage Set
93KON 14D
613
BE
1 Closer
D3550
690
ST
1 Wall Bumper
409
613
RO
NOTE: PROVIDE BULKHEAD THRESHOLD AS REQUIRED BY ROOF FLASHING AND
CURB DETAILS.
SET #26 - EXTERIOR
Doors: D 112
3 Hinges
FBB 168 5 X 4 1/2 NRP
642
ST
I Lockset
93K- 7D14DS3 X SCH
613
BE
1 Cylinder
23 -065
606
SC
I Overhead Stop
4000 Series
613
AB
1 Saddle Threshold
425 DKB
NA
I Gasketing
110 SDKB
NA
1 Sweep
600 DKB
NA
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-13
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
Opening List
Openini
Hdw Set
DOO1
4
D002
3
D003
2
D004
5
D005
1
D006
3
D007
2
D008
4
D009A
2
D009B
2
DO10
2
DO11A
2
DOIIB
6
DOIIC
2
DIOI
10
D102
10
D103A
12
D103B
11
D 104
5
D105
2
D 107
5
D108A
9
D109
I1
DI IOA
4
DIIOB
14
DIIIA
B
DOIIB
13
D112
26
D114
15
D115
3
D116
2
D117
12
DI18A
19
DI 18B
20
D119A
13
D1 19B
3
D120
21
D121
16
D 122A
2
D 122
16
D123
18
D124
17
D180B
8
D182A
9
D182B
7
D184A
9
D184B
7
D186A
9
D 186B
7
D188
9
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-14
fI
Fj
e
1
J
n
r
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D188B 7
D 190 9
D 190B 7
D 192 9
D192B 7
D 194A 9
D194B 7
D196A 9
D 196 7
D201A 9
D201 22
D201C 7
D202 3
D206 13
D208 3
D209 3
D210 23
D21 1 9
D21 1B 7
D280A 9
D290B 7
D282A 9
D282B 7
D284A 9
D284B 7
D286A 9
D286B 7
D288A 9
D288B 7
D290A 9
D290B 7
D292A 9
D292B 7
D294A 9
D294B 7
D296A 9
D296B 8
D301A 7
D301 9
D302 9
D302A 7
D303 23
D304A 9
D304B 9
D305 3
D306 2
D309 3
D310 3
D311 23
D312A 9
D312B 7
D380A 9
D380B 8
D382A 9
D382B 7
D384A 9
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-15
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D394B
7
D386A
9
D386B
7
D388A
9
D388B
7
D390A
9
D390B
7
D392A
9
D392B
7
D394A
9
D394B
7
D396A
9
D396B
8
D401
7
D401
7
D401C
7
D401 D
7
D402
23
D403A
23
D403B
25
D403C
23
D403 E
7
D404
23
D405
7
D406
23
D407
24
D501
7
D501 B
7
D502
23
D503
23
D504
23
D505
23
D506A
7
D506C
7
D601
7
D002A
7
D602B
7
D602C
7
D602D
7
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-16
t
1
J
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PARTI- GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Hollow Metal Frames.
2. Aluminum clad wood windows.
3. Doors.
B. Related Section: Division 8 Section "Exterior Glazing Systems" for exterior glazing requirements.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing
publications.
B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified
gas.
C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal ttse that are attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacntrer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking,
and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal tinder normal use that is attributed to the
manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and
cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturers written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the
following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in constriction.
B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following
maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and
glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss.
I . Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated including warranty.
B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) square Samples for glass.
I GLAZING
08800-1
I'
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Wired glass.
2. Clear Uncoated Vision Glass. '
3. Insulating glass for each designation indicated.
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record
of successful in- service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified
under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or
Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
Referenced Standards: Comply with published standards of Flat Glass Marketing Association, latest
edition and all applicable manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Insulated Glass: Insulated glass shall meet performance requirements of ASTM E774 (Class
CBA). Insulating glass units shall be manufactured by a member of Insulating Glass Certification
Council (IGCC) or Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturing Association (SIGMA). Units shall be
double sealed with %2 -inch minimum air space, a single seal is not acceptable.
C.
Source Limitations for Clear Glass: Obtain clear float glass from one primary-glass manufacturer.
D.
Source Limitations for Insulating Glass: Obtain insulating -glass units from one manufacturer using the
same type of glass and other components for each type of unit indicated.
E.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each
product and installation method indicated.
F.
Glass Product Testing. Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a
qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.
1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and
capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
G.
Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,
based on testing according to NFPA 252.
H.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and
ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of
Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
1.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and
organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
GLAZING 08800-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
J. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one
component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following inspecting and testing
agency:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent
damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun,
or other causes_
B. Every individual piece of glass shall have a label designating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove
labels until inspected by Architect.
C. For insulating -glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating -
glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel
substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and nm
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 — PRODUCTS
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A_ Manufacturers (Tempered Glass): Subject to compliance with requirements indicated on Drawings,
provide products by one of the following:
I _ PPG, Inc.
2. Temp Safe Inc.
3. Kwik Temp
4. General Glass Corporation
5. Guardian Industries Corporation
6. PPG Industries
7. AFGD
8. HPG Industries
9. Tempglass
10. Viracon
2.03 GLASS
A. Primary Float Glass: Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing
select); class as indicated on drawings.
GLAZING 08800-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Heat- Treated Float Glass:
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to
bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Heat - Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing
select); class, kind, and condition as indicated on drawings.
C. Insulating, Low -E, Heat - Treated Float Glass:
1. General: Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) products where safety glass is required. t
2. Low -E- Coated Film: Suspended in the interspace.
3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Manufacturer's standard for altitude and
wind zone of project.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5_ Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.
6. Self- Cleaning, Low - Maintenance Coating: Pyrolytic coating on first surface.
7. Indoor Lite: Class I (clear) float glass.
2.04 WIRE GLASS
A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type lI (patterned and wired glass, flat), Class I (clear), Quality q8
(glazing); 6.4 mm thick; of form and mesh pattern indicated below:
1. Polished Wired Glass: Form t (wired, polished both sides), and as follows:
a) Mesh m2 (square).
2_ Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a) Ashai Glass Co. /Ama Glass Corp.
b) Central Glass Co., Ltd.
c) Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.
d) Pilkington Glass Ltd.
2.05 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating -Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated
interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units.
1. Provide Kind HS (heat- strengtliened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist
thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass
design requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Provide Kind FT (fully
tempered) where safety glass is indicated.
2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions as indicated on drawings are
nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of
glass lites at unit's edge.
3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. ,
2.06 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
I. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other
materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
GLAZING
08800-4
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2_ Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting
glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of
installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for
this characteristic.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid- applied, chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications
for type, grade, class, and uses.
I . Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is required, provide
products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic
movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width
existing at time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920
for uses indicated.
C. Glazing Sealant for Fire - Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain
fire- protection rating.
2.07 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Lock -Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded
comer units and zipper lock strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.
B. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with
standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
t. Neoprene, ASTM C 864.
2. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1 1 15.
4. Any material indicated above.
C. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral- skinned gaskets of material
indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type I1, black; and of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal:
I. Neoprene.
2. EPDM.
3. Thermoplastic potyolefin rubber.
4_ Any material indicated above.
2.08 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard,
requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a
proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by
glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
GLAZING 08800-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NOR'T'H '
Vail, Colorado
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).
2.09 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS t
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B_ Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at
corners_
2. Presence and fiunctioning of weep system. ,
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass - framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A_ Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
3.03
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
B.
Glazing channel dimensions, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and
adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions
during installation_
C.
Maintain minimum glazing tolerance between glass faces and frame or metal stops as recommended by
the Flat Glass Marketing Association. For %a -inch thick glass, maintain 1/8 -inch clearance between
glass face and metal stops.
D.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project
site and legally dispose of off Project site_ Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other
imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
E_
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconsmiction sealant- substrate testing.
F.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,
unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant
suitable for heel bead.
G.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass liter_
GLAZING 08800-6
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
H. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as
follows:
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are
used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with
system performance requirements.
2. Provide 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
I. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing
channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced
glazing publications.
J. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
3.04 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly,
with stretch allowance during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints
miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by
inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops- Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to
produce a weatherlight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
1
3.05 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gaskel manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet
seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.
3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels,
and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations,
including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent
intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of din, scum, alkaline
deposits, or stains; remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during constriction period.
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by
glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING
08800 - 7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: systems for a horizontal application
1. Metal lath and accessories.
2. Portland cement plaster.
3. Acrylic -based finishes.
B. Related Section: Subcontractor responsible for Work of this Section shall comply with Division 7
Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim"
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data for each product specified.
B. Samples for selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of
units at least 12 inches (300 mm) square showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available
for each type of finish indicated.
1. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or
more units showing the full range of variations expected.
2. Include similar Samples of material For joints and accessories involving color selection.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with specified
requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer (applicator) who has specialized in the
application of Portland cement plaster similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and who is acceptable to stucco system manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain materials from one source.
C. Mockups: Prior to installing plaster work, construct panels for each type of finish and application
required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for final unit of Work.
I . Locate mockups on -site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Contractor.
2. Erect mockups 48 by 96 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) by full thickness in presence of Contractor
using materials, including lath, support system, and control joints, indicated for final Work.
3. Notify Contractor 7 days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Contractor's approval of mockups before start of plaster Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during constriction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed portland cement plaster Work.
a. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
� I PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220- 1
II
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application
standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and
after plaster application.
B_ Cold- Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or permanent, as required to protect
each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after application. Distribute heat uniformly to
prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provide deflection or protective screens.
C. Warm- Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong
flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job
conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to
deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required.
D. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F (4 deg Q.
E. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plastering. Provide temporary
covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A: Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Wire- Fabric Lath:
a. Davis Wire Corporation.
b. Jaenson Wire Company.
C. Keystone Steel & Wire Co.
d_ K -Lath Building Products.
2. Metal Accessories:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b_ Metalex (Keene Products).
C. MM Systems Corp.
d. National Gypsum Co.
e. Pittcon Industries.
f. Unimast, Inc.
g. United States Gypsum Co.
h. Western Metal Lath Co.
2.2 LATH
A. Woven -Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032, fabricated into 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) hexagonal - shaped mesh with
minimum 0.0510 -inch- (1.3 -nun -) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below;
coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-2
a
1
a
I. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick.
2. Galavanized steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick
3. Type as indicated on drawings.
G. Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer's standard profile designed for use at sill plate line to form
plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from zinc - coated (galvanized)
steel sheet.
H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated.
1. Exterior Insulation Finish System Formed Relief (Projections):
I. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and
finish -coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved
for use by system manufacturer for Project.
2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: Match field color of Portland Cement Plaster as
selected by Contractor.
3. Primer - Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates
from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and
adhesive used for application of insulation.
4_ Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for
use, compatible with substrate-
s. Molded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by expansion of
polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold. Comply with system manufacturer's
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc - coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying
with ASTM A 653, G40 (ASTM A 653M, Z90) minimum coating designation.
2. Zinc -Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc.
B.
Metal Comer Reinforcement: Expanded, large -mesh, diamond -metal lath fabricated from zinc -alloy or
welded -wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475 -inch- (1.2 -mm -) diameter, zinc - coated (galvanized) wire and
specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while
allowing full plaster encasement_
C.
Cornerbeads: Small nose comerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of
large -mesh diamond -metal lath allowing full plaster encasement.
I . Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
D.
Casing Beads: Square -edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material:
I . Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
2_ Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
E.
Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:
1. Zinc AIloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick_
2. Galavanized steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick
3. One piece type: Folded par of honperforated screeds in M- shaped configuration, with expanded or
perforated flanges.
a_ Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints.
F.
Aesthetic Joints: Prefabricated, of material indicated below:
I. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick.
2. Galavanized steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick
3. Type as indicated on drawings.
G. Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer's standard profile designed for use at sill plate line to form
plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from zinc - coated (galvanized)
steel sheet.
H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations indicated.
1. Exterior Insulation Finish System Formed Relief (Projections):
I. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and
finish -coat materials, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved
for use by system manufacturer for Project.
2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns of Finish Coat: Match field color of Portland Cement Plaster as
selected by Contractor.
3. Primer - Sealer: System manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to seal substrates
from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and
adhesive used for application of insulation.
4_ Adhesive for Application of Insulation: System manufacturer's standard formulation designed for
use, compatible with substrate-
s. Molded - Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by expansion of
polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold. Comply with system manufacturer's
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type 1, and "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded
Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for more stringent requirements for material performance and
qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following:
a. Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six
weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.
b. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1219 mm) and in
thickness indicated but not more than 4 inches (102 mm) or less than that allowed by
ASTM PS 49.
6. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali- resistant, open -weave glass -fiber mesh treated for
compatibility with other system materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained
mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 Ibf /in. (21 dN/cm) per EIMA 105.01, complying with
ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight:
a. Standard Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz. /sq. yd. (136 g/sq. m).
b. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz. /sq. yd. (127 g/sq. m).
C. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4 ozJsq. yd. (136 g /sq. m).
d. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz. /sq. yd. (244 g/sq. m).
7. Base -Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture.
8. Primer: System manufacturer's standard factory-mixed elastomeric- polymer primer for preparing
base -coat surface for application of finish coat.
9. Finish -Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture. Manufacturer's waterproof, clear
acrylic -based sealer for protecting finish coat.
2.4
PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II_
B. Colorants for Job -Mixed Finish- Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster
color to match Architect's sample.
C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
E. Acrylic -Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic - emulsion coating systems, formulated with
colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include
manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic -based finishes.
Available Products:
a. Bonsai, W. R. Co.;
b. CheunRex, SonoWall Stucco Systems;
C_ Dryvit Systems, Inc.;
d. El Rey Stucco, Inc.
e_ Parex Incorporated;
f Pleko Products, Inc.;
g_ Senergy, Inc.;
h. Sto Corp.;
L Strc -O -Flex International, Inc.;
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-4
I
f
J
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.5 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base -coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes_
Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not
exceed 1 lb of fiber /cu. ft. (16 kg of fiber /cu. m) of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate
quantities accordingly to maintain workability.
B. Portland Cement Base -Coat Mixes:
L Over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork as follows:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix I part portland cement and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 parts
lime. Use 2 -1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
volumes of each component material)_
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 parts
lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate
volumes of each component material).
2. Over Monolithic Concrete: Single base coats for two -coat plasterwork as follows:
a. For cementitious material, mix I part portland cement and 0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2 -1/2 to
4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each
component material).
3. Over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two -coat plasterwork as follows:
a. For cementitious material, mix I part portland cement and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 parts lime. Use 2-
t /2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each
component material).
C. Factory- Prepared Finish -Coat Mixes: For acrylic -based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline- resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of
contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.
B. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable.
C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932_
D. Building Paper: 2 layers of 10 minute; or I layer of 60 minute moisture resistance rated Grade D asphalt
saturated Kraft building paper conforming with U.B.0 Standard No. 14; or I layer of asplualt- sahurated
felt complying with ASTM D226 Type 1.
E. Building Wrap Tape: Pressure- sensitive plastic tape recommended by building wrap manufacturer for
sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
F. Line Wire: 0.0475 -inch- (1.2 -mm -) diameter, zinc- coated (galvanized), soft, annealed steel wire_
G. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.1 12
inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.
I PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220-5
� I
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH t
Vail, Colorado
2.7 MIXING
A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced
application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer_
2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS '
A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide system manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically
curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related '
materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in "EIMA Guide for Use of
Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB" and with requirements in Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below:
1. Low - modulus, multipart, nonsag urethane sealant. '
2. Low - modulus silicone sealant.
B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and complying '
with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
C. Sealant Color: Comply with the following requirements: '
I . Match finish -coat color of system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL
A. In accordance with Manufacture's written instructions. '
B. Standards: Comply with ML /SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with
requirements of ASTM C 1063. '
C. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures,
equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, fiirnishings, and similar work to comply with details
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring '
manufacturer_
D_ Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where '
partition sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building
structure. Install slip- or cushion -type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.
I . Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing
or accessories.
E. Install additional framing, fiurring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for
other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not '
indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing system.
32 LATHING '
A. Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide
appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply
with referenced ML /SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards.
PORTLAND CEMENT
PLASTER 09220-6 '
:
i
UON SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
I. Exterior horizontal surfaces using woven -wire lath with 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) hexagonal- shaped
' mesh with minimum 0.0510 -inch- (1.3 -mm -) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
2. Exterior sheathed soffit surfaces using woven -wire lath with 1 -1/2 -inch (38 -mm) hexagonal -
shaped mesh with minimum 0.0510 -inch- (1.3 -mm -) diameter, galvanized steel wire.
3.3 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
A. In accordance with Manufacture's written instructions.
' B. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and
substances that may impair the Work.
t C_ Install screeds and temporary grounds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate
with plaster -coat work.
1. Terminate base of stucco system with weep screed in direct contact with concrete foundations in
accordance with Manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds, if any.
E. Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing as indicated.
F. Surface Conditioning: Immediately before plastering, dampen concrete and concrete unit masonry
surfaces that are indicated for direct plaster application, except where a bonding agent has been applied.
Determine and apply amount of moisture and degree of saturation that will result in optimum suction for
plastering.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES
A. In accordance with Manufacture's written instructions.
. B. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of
plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at comers; install with tight joints and in
alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment
' during plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations:
I. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners.
' 2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Control Joints: Install at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by
Contractor:
' a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind
plaster membrane.
b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet (5.4 m) in either direction or a
length -to -width ratio of 2 -1/2 to 1.
c_ Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. in) in area.
d. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of
plaster membrane.
15 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with
ASTM C 926.
B. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by foreign materials.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-7
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from
a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge placed at any
location on surface.
E. Grout hollow -metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base -coat plaster
material, and before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire -
resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches (152 mm) at each jamb anchor.
F. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be
damaged by installation of other.
G. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built -in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground,
unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut
base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.
H. Corners: Make internal comers and angles square; finish external comers flush with cornerbeads on
interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work.
Number of Coats: As indicated by Manufacturer's product designations.
J. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements:
I. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) to completely cover
base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine - textured finish matching Contractor's
sample or selection.
2. Prepared Finish: Apply acrylic -based finish coats according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
K. Moist -cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for
time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations."
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to
perform field quality- control tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and report whether tested Work complies with or
deviates from requirements.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace portland cement plaster Work that inspections and test
reports indicate do not comply with requirements.
C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Subcontractors expense, will be performed to detenrine compliance
of corrected Work with requirements.
3.7
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point tip plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks
and indented surfaces. Point -up finish plaster surfaces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster
surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence,
excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required
visual effects.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-8
' LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
' A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work.
Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered_ Repair
surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is
' completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure plaster work is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09220
1]
I PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220-9
I'
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART i - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product rata: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples: For the following products:
I. Trim Accessories: Full -size Sample in 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
2_ Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same
backing indicated for Work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire - resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B. STC -Rated Assemblies: For STC -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those
tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an
independent testing agency.
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
I. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed
surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
A. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
I I GYPSUM BOARD
09250- I
I'
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of
gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a. American Gypsum Co.
b. BPB America Inc.
C. G -P Gypsum.
d. Lafarge North America Inc.
C. National Gypsum Company.
f. PABCO Gypsum.
g. Temple.
h. USG Corporation.
B. Regular Type:
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Type X:
I . Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board.
I . Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
E. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C I t77/C I I77M.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Glass Gold" by G -P Gypsum.
2. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
F. Moisture- and Mold - Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold - resistant core and surfaces_
_ Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.
2.2 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A_ General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 glass mesh.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with
other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
I. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim
flanges, use setting -type taping compound.
a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories.
2. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
3. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations_
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to
continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated_
D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by
combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
I . Fire - Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1 Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation."
2.4 TEX "PURE FINISHES
A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B. Finish Levels:
1. Provide Level I finish at concealed spaces and plenums.
2. Provide Level 2 finish on substrates for the and applied wood finishes.
3. Provide Level 4 finish where exposed or indicated to receive paint.
C. Aggregate Finish: Water- based, job - mixed, aggregated, drying -type texture finish for spray application.
1 _ Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. G -P Gypsum; Georgia- Pacific Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite.
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated).
D_ Drywall texture at East Entry Lobby, Fitness Room Wainscot and Fitness Reslroom:
I 1 GYPSUM BOARD
09250-3
I'
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Texture:
2. Paint:
3. Color:
4. Type:
5. Finish:
6. Installation:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Medium Skip - Trowel.
Sherwin Williams
to be determined by architect
Super Paint
Eggshell or Satin
2 coats over prime coat as needed
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load- bearing partitions at structural abutments, except
Floors. Provide 114- to 1/2 -inch- (6.4- to 12.7 -mm -) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with
edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces
with acoustical sealant_
D. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal comer construction. Do
not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide- dimension lumber, including Floor joists and
headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood
shrinkage.
E. STC -Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of
partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound - flanking paths around or through
assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
3.2 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
I. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type X: Where required for fire- resistance -rated assembly.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back Flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for
panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless othervise indicated.
2. Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
3. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
4. L -Bead: Use where indicated.
5_ U -Bead: Use where indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
6. Curved -Edge Comerbead: Use at curved openings.
' 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener
heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B_ Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas_
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
D_ Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level l: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Core and shell areas of project.
3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
a_ Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.
5. Level5: none.
3.5 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving
texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform
texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of
application patterns.
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by
covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions,
texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage
according to texture -finish mannfachtrer's written recommendations.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and
other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
I. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM BOARD 09250-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09265 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Rated walls to achieve a 2 -hour rating, or as otherwise indicated on Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft -wall assembly indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire- Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire -
resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. American Gypsum Company.
2. BPB America Inc.
3. G -P Gypsum.
4. Lafarge North America Inc.
5_ National Gypsum Company.
6. PABCO Gypsum.
7. Temple- Inland Forest Products Corporation.
8. USG Corporation.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL
A_ Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire- resistance -rated assemblies
indicated.
1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end -to -end butt joints.
2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft -wall assembly manufacturer's
written recommendations.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.
I . Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture- resistant paper faces.
a. Core: 2 inch (25.4 mm) thick.
b. Long Edges: Double bevel.
2. Moisture- and Mold - Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels and with moisture -
and mold - resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273.
a. Core: 2 inch (25.4 mm) thick.
b. Long Edges: Double bevel.
B. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's
written recommendations.
B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in
Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft -wall assembly manufacturer's
written recommendations for application indicated.
C. Gypsum Board Joint- Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board."
D. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies so both elements
of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire - resistive materials removed or
damaged during installation of shaft -wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 7
Section "Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials."
I. Before sprayed fire - resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner
tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire- resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates
are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (610
mm) o.c.
B. After sprayed fire - resistive materials are applied_ remove only to extent necessary for installation of
gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies and without reducing the fire - resistive material thickness below that
which is required to obtain fire- resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire - resistive materials from
damage_
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265-2
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire- resistance -rated
assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:
I. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated.
2_ Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.
B.
Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft -wall assemblies; frame both sides of
expansion joints with furring and other support.
C.
Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies around openings and as required
for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy
trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft -wall assembly framing.
I . At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame.
2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel
reinforcing strip with 0.0312 -inch (0.79 -mm) minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal,
accurately positioned and secured behind at least l gypsum board face -layer panel.
D.
Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies
where required to enclose rods.
E.
At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire- resistance rating of shaft -wall assembly by installing
supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing
wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
F.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while
maintaining continuity of fire -rated construction.
G.
Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire- resistance -rated assembly
indicated.
H_ Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by
Architect, while maintaining fire- resistance rating of gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies.
1. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other
work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand
' dislocation by air - pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke -
tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions,
whichever are more stringent.
' J. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft -wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches (102
mm) of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or
5/8 -inch- (13- or 16 -mm -) thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed
(at steel beams especially).
1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and
secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. with screws fastened to shaft -wall
' framing.
2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches (610
mm) o.c. and extend studs from the projection to shaft -wall framing_
' K. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3
mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing_
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265-3
r
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and
other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,
sagging, and irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface
contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09265
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT -WALL ASSEMBLIES 09265-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09310 — FLOOR AND WALL TILE
PARTI - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Porcelain tile.
2. Waterproof and crack suppression membrane for thin -set tile installations.
3. Cementitious backer units.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width
indicated.
B. Facial Dimension: Nominal the size as defined in ANSI A137.1.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following
values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6.
3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of life. mortar, grout, and other products specified.
B. Tile Samples for Selection: Manufacturers color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of the
indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
C. Grout Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of grout showing
the full range of colors available for each type of grout indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Of each item listed below, prepared on Samples of size and constriction
indicated. Where products involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the
full range of variations expected.
1. Each type and composition of file and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches (300
mm) square, mounted on braced cementitious backer units, and with grouted joints using product
complying with specified requirements and approved for completed work in color or colors
selected by Architect_
2. Full -size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required.
3. Metal edge strips in 6 -inch (150 -mm) lengths.
I I FLOOR AND WALL TILE
09310-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the products furnished comply with
requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed tile installations similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service
performance.
B. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from
one source with resources to provide products from the same production run for each contiguous area of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each
mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source
or producer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is completed and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained to comply with referenced standards and
manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1, Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full -size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for
each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A_ In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not Iimited to, the products specified.
2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the manufacturers specified.
TILE PRODUCTS
A. Available Manufacturers:
1. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.
2. American Olean; Div. of Dal -Tile International Corp.
3. Buchtal Corporation USA.
4. Cerim -Floor Gres Porcelainhe.
5. Crossville Porcelains Company, L.P.
6_ Daltile; Div. of Dal -Tile International Inc.
7. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
8. GranitiFiandre.
9. Interporcelain.
10. KPT, Inc.
11. Laufen USA.
12. Lone Star Porcelains Company.
13. Metropolitan Porcelains.
14. Monarch Tile, Inc.
15. Porcelanite, Inc.
16. Quarry Tile Company.
17. Seneca Tiles, Inc.
18. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
19. United States Porcelain Tile Company_
20. Winbum Tile Manufacturing Company.
B. Tile Products: As indicated on the Finish Schedule, or selected by Unit owner, in accordance with Section
01210 Allowances.
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Porcelain Tile Standard: Provide the that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Porcelain Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
t. Provide tile complying with Standard Grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated_
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards
referenced in "Setting Materials" and "Grouting Materials" articles.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and
other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements:
I. Match colors, textures, and pattems indicated by referencing manufacturers standard designations
for these characteristics.
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-3
r
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturees full range of colors, textures, and patterns for
products of type indicated.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample
submittals, blend the in the factory and package so tile units taken from one package show the same range
in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
2.4 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Wall Tile: Provide flat tile as indicated in the Finish Schedule and as follows:
I. Public restroom wainscot:
Source Capco Tile
Contact Pat Gooch
Material Porcelain Tile
Tile Number IA E17RT
Size 7" x 7"
Accent Tile Number IA EMK 3
Size 14" x 14" on mesh backing
2. Use epoxy grout at base, in lieu of cove base, if acceptable.
3. Use cove base noted tinder quarry the if required.
4. Install 2 rows of accent tile above wainscot.
5. Seal grout. Align'accent the with backsplash of countertop
6. Install wood trim above accent tile to finish
7. For latex - portland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat with temporary protective
coating.
2.5 INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Floor Tile:
I. Installation Method: TCA F122 (thin -set mortar bonded to waterproof membrane over concrete
slab).
a. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A 108.5 with the following mortar and grout:
1) Dry-se( or latex portland cement mortar.
2) Sanded latex - portland cement grout (for joints greater than 1/8 ")
3) Dry-set grout.
4) Unsanded latex - portland cement grout (for joints 1/8" or smaller).
2. Installation Method: TCA F113 (thin -set mortar bonded to subfloor).
a. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A 108.5 with the following mortar and grout:
I) Dry-set or latex portland cement mortar.
2) Sanded latex - portland cement groat (for joints greater than 1/8")
3) Dry-set grout_
4) Unsanded latex - portland cement grout (for joints 1/8" or smaller).
B. Wall Tile:
1. Installation Methods:
1) TCA W243 (thin -set mortar bonded to gypsum board on metal studs).
2) TCA W244 (thin -set mortar bonded to cementitious backer units on metal studs).
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3) TCA B412 (bathtub walls: thin -set mortar bonded to cementitious backer units on
metal studs).
b. Setting Bed and Grout: ANSI A108.5 with the following mortar and grout:
I ) Dry-set portland cement mortar.
2) Latex - portland cement mortar.
3) Sanded latex- portland cement grout (for joints greater than 1/8 ")
4) Dry-set grout.
5) Unsanded latex - portland cement grout (for joints 1/8" or smaller).
2.6 WATERPROOFING AND CRACK SUPPRESSION FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS
A_ General: Provide products that comply with ANSI Al 18.10 and the descriptions in this Article.
B. Polyethylene -Sheet Waterproofing: Manufacturer's standard proprietary product consisting of composite
sheets, 60 inches (152 mm) wide by a nominal thickness of 0.030 inches (0.76 mm), composed of an
inner layer of nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene sheet faced on both sides with laminated, high -
strength, nonwoven polyester material, designed for embedding in latex - portland cement mortar and as
the substrate for latex - portland cement mortar setting bed.
1. Available Products:: Nobleseal TS; Noble Company (The).
C. Chlorinated - Polyethylene -Sheet Product: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides
with high - strength, nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex - portland cement mortar; 60 inches
(1524 mm) wide by 0.030 -inch (0.76 -mm) nominal thickness.
. Available Product: Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS.
D. PVC -Sheet Product: Two layers of PVC sheet heat -fused together and to facings of bondable nonwoven
polyester, for adhering to latex - portland cement mortar; 60 inches (1524 mm) wide by 0.040 -inch (1.01 -
mm) nominal thickness.
I . Available Product: Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold.
E. Polyethylene -Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing for adhering to latex -
portland cement mortar; 39 inches (1000 mm) wide by 0.008 -inch (0.203 -mm) nominal thickness.
I . Available Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.
F. Fabric - Reinforced, Modified - Bituminous -Sheet Product: Self- adhering SBS- modified - bituminous sheet
with woven reinforcement facing for adhering to latex - portland cement mortar; 36 inches (914 mm) wide
by 0.040 -inch (1.01 -mm) nominal thickness.
1. Available Product: National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex.
I 2.7 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
' A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 118.1.
1. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
B. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 119.4.
1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry additive to which only water must be added.
I I FLOOR AND WALL TILE
09310-5
h
d
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - Modified, portland- cement -based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile - setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Vapor Barmier: Asphalt- saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt),
unperforated.
C. Metal Edge Strips: White- zinc -alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 ntm) wide at top edge with integral
provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed
surfaces of the against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products;
and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
I . Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile.
E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written
Vail, Colorado
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
2_ Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with liquid -latex additive.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
C.
Standard Sanded Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6, color as indicated.
D.
Standard Unsanded Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6, color as indicated.
'
E.
Polymer - Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A 118.7, color as indicated.
I . Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Polymer Type: Liquid -latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.
2.8
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and
characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.9
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - Modified, portland- cement -based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile - setting materials for installations indicated.
B. Vapor Barmier: Asphalt- saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt),
unperforated.
C. Metal Edge Strips: White- zinc -alloy terrazzo strips, 1/8 inch (3.2 ntm) wide at top edge with integral
provision for anchorage to mortar bed or substrate, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed
surfaces of the against adherence of mortar and grout; is compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products;
and is easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
I . Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a
melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially
formulated and recommended for use as a temporary protective coating for tile.
E. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout
surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.
2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
I
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written
instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures to produce mortars and grouts of unifomm quality with optimum performance characteristics
for installations indicated.
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-6
1
F1
1
1
7
1
1
11
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are fine; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 series of the
installation standards for installations indicated_
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of
work, and similar items located in or behind the has been completed before installing tile.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone and are incompatible with tile - setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy -duty wire brush.
B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex- portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A 108 series of tile installation standards for
installations indicated_
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile- setting material manufacturer's written
instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify
that the has been blended in the factory and packaged so the units taken from one package show the same
range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended,
either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
D. Field - Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated tinder tile type or needed to prevent
adhesion or staining of exposed tile surfaces by grout, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence
of mortar and grout by precoating them with a continuous film of temporary protective coating indicated
below, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces:
1. Petroleum paraffin wax or grout release.
3.3 INS "fALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with pars of ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards in
"Specifications for Installation of Porcelain Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and
to methods indicated in porcelain tile installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Porcelain Tile Installation." Comply with TCA
installation methods indicated in porcelain the installation schedules.
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-7
L]
A.
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering
B_
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated_ Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of the abutting trim, finish, or built -in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit the closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or
C.
covers overlap tile.
'
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center the fields in both directions in
each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless
D.
otherwise indicated.
F.
Lay out the wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G.
Grout the to comply with the requirements of the following tile installation standards:
A.
1. For porcelain tile grouts (sand- portland cement, dry-set, commercial portland cement, and latex -
portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A 108.10_
2. For chemical- resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A 108.6.
3.4
VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to produce a vapor barrier of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate.
3.5
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Porcelain Tile Floor Installation Schedule,
including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A 108 series of tile installation standards.
B_
Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings:
I. Porcelain Mosaic Tile: 1 /I6 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm).
3. Floor Tile: 1/4 inch (6.35 unm).
C.
Back Buttering: For installations indicated, obtain 100 percent mortar coverage by complying with
'
applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of the
installation standards:
I Tile floors installed with chemical- resistant mortars and
. grouts.
D.
Metal Edge Strips: Install at floor material transitions locations or where exposed edge of tile flooring
meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
3.6
WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Install types of the designated for wail installations to comply with requirements in the Porcelain Tile
Wall Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed
standards.
B.
Joint Widths: Install tile on wall with the following joint widths unless indicated otherwise on the
Drawings:
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-8
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
' Vail, Colorado
1. Porcelain Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all porcelain tile surfaces so they are free of
foreign matter.
I . Remove latex- portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout
manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface
with clean water before and after cleaning.
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is
acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging
drains.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded,
and otherwise defective tile work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,
that ensure tile is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to
completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09310
FLOOR AND WALL TILE 09310-9
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09385 - DIMENSION STONE TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
L Dimension stone tile and related setting materials applied to floors.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections include the following:
I . Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in stone tile with elastomeric sealants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension Stone Tile: Modular units less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, fabricated from natural stone.
B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width.
C. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Each stone tile type.
2. Setting and grouting materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show stone tile sizes, dimensions of tiled Floor areas, joint patterns, bedding, and details
showing relationship of tile units to adjacent work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers standard Samples showing the full range of colors, textures,
and patterns available for each type of stone tile indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: Full -size units of each type of stone tile indicated; in sets showing the full
range of variations expected in these characteristics.
E. Maintenance Data: For stone tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who employs only workers trained in installing the
products similar to those required for this Project.
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09395- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Mockups: Before installing stone tile, build mockups for each the type required to verify selections made
under sample Submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution.
Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed
Work:
1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work.
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed.
7. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial
Completion.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in factory wrappings, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer
and lot number_ Store materials off the ground in a dry, warm, well - ventilated, weathertight location.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install dimension stone tile until spaces are enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions
are maintained to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence stone tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during
remainder of construction period.
B. Install stone the and accessories only after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A_ Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra fiill -sized stone tiles matching installed tile in a quantity
equal to 2 percent of the amount of each the type installed, packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385-2
1
1
'J
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
Tile- Setting and - Grouting Materials:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Atlas Minerals & Chemicals, Inc.
C. Boiardi Products Corporation.
d. Bonsal: W. R. Bonsai Company.
e. Bostik.
f. C -Cure Corporation.
g. Custom Building Products.
h. Dal -Tile Corporation.
i. DAP, Inc.
j. Laticrete International, Inc.
k. Mapei Corporation.
I. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
M. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
n. TEC Incorporated.
2. Stone Floor Sealers:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Bostik.
C. Custom Building Products.
d. Hillyard Floor Treatments.
e. HMK Stone Care Products.
f. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2.2 STONE PRODUCTS
A. Provide stone tiles that are free of cracks, seams, starts, and other defects impairing their fiunction for use
indicated.
B. Provide stone thresholds that are free of cracks, seams, starts, and other defects impairing their structural
integrity or function.
C. Quartzite Stone Tile:
1. Source: Capco, Silverthome
2. Contact: Pat Gooch 970 - 513 -7901
3. Style Number: ST SLSVS 16G
4. Material Stone, Silver Sands Quartzite Slate
5. Finish: Natural
6. Size: 16" x 16"
7. Thickness: 3/8" to'' /z" to 1 /4"
8. Grout: Custom Building Products tt 50 Chaparral
9. Status: Stocked
10. Location: East Tower first floor entry lobby and elevator lobby.
2.3 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A 1 18.4, consisting of the following:
1. Mixture of Dry- Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry- mortar mix and
liquid -latex additive complying with the following requirements:
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 -3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
C. For wall applications, provide nonsagging, latex - portland cement mortar complying with
ANSI A 118.4 for mortar of this type defined in Section F- 2.1.2.
B. Medium -Bed, Latex - Portland Cement Mortar: Provide materials recommended by manufacturer for
medium -bed application and consisting of the following, with physical properties equaling or exceeding
those required for thin -set mortars based on testing of medium -bed specimens according to ANSI A118.4:
I. Prepackaged Dry-Mortar Mix: Factory- prepared mixture of portland cement; dry, redispersible,
ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to which only water needs to be added at
Project site.
2. Mixture of Dry-Mortar Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of prepackaged dry-mortar mix and
liquid -latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a_ Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
b. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
2.4
GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Grout Colors: Where manufacturer's standard grout products are indicated, provide colors to comply with
the following requirement:
I. Match Architect's sample.
2. Match color indicated by referencing manufacturer's color designations.
3. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Latex - Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al 18.6 for materials described in H -2.4, composed as follows:
1. Factory- Prepared, Dry-Grout Mixture: Factory- prepared mixture of portland cement; dry,
redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive; and other ingredients to produce the following:
a. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.
b. Sanded grout mixture for joints 118 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.
2. Mixture of Dry -Grout Mix and Latex Additive: Mixture of factory- prepared, dry-grout mix and
latex additive complying with the following requirements:
a. Unsanded Dry-Grout Mix: Dry-set grout complying with ANSI A 118.6 for materials
described in Section H -2.3, for joints 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and narrower.
b. Sanded Dry-Grout Mix: Commercial portland cement groat complying with ANSI A 118.6
for materials described in Section H -2.1, for joints t/8 inch (3.2 mm) and wider.
c Latex Additive: Styrene butadiene rubber.
d. Latex Additive: Acrylic resin.
2.5
ACCESSORIES
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI AI 18.9.
I. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1
II
1
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385-4 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. The Original Wonderboard; Custom Building Products.
b. Wonderboard Multi +Board; Custom Building Products.
C. DomCrete Cementitious Tile- Backer Board; Domtar Gypsum.
d. Util -A -Crete Concrete Backer Board; FinPan, Inc.
e. DUROCK Cement Board; United States Gypsum Co.
B. Leveling and Patching Compound for Concrete: Trowelable cementitious compound made for leveling
and patching concrete floors and acceptable to setting material manufacturer.
C. Primer - Sealer for Wood Subfloors: Product recommended by setting material manufacturer.
D. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, height to match stone tile and setting -bed thickness, metallic or
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, exposed -
edge material as follows:
1. Material: Half -hard brass.
2. Material: White zinc alloy.
3. Material: Nickel silver.
4. Material: Stainless steel; ASTM A 666, Type 302.
E. Cleaner: As recommended by stone tile manufacturer.
F. Sealer for Floors: Colorless, slip- and stain- resistant sealer, not affecting color or physical properties of
stone surfaces as recommended by stone tile manufacturer for application indicated.
L Provide sealer that will not reduce stone tile's static coefficient of friction below that specified.
2.6 FABRICATION
11 3.1 EXAMINATION
I DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385-5
A.
Natural -Cleft Finish: Split stone along natural cleavage surfaces to produce finished faces with uneven
surfaces free of visible tool marks and with a gap not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm), when faces are tested
for flatness with a 24 -inch (600 -mm) straightedge.
B.
Joint Surfaces: Except for specified beveled or eased edges, if any, dress joint surfaces square for full
depth of tile.
C.
Backs of Pieces: Dress backs of pieces smooth and flat. When tested with a 24 -inch (600 -mm)
straightedge, gap shall not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)_
I. Backs of natural -cleft stone need not be dressed if gap does not exceed 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) when
tested with a 24 -inch (600 -mm) straightedge.
D.
Thresholds: Size and profile as indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor
finishes.
r 1
_ Bevel edges of thresholds at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish.
Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch (13 nun) or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold.
PART 3
- EXECUTION
11 3.1 EXAMINATION
I DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado ,
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where stone the will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting the are firm; dry; clean; free from oil, waxy films, and curing
compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile ,
installation standards for installations indicated.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of
work, and similar items located in or behind the has been completed before installing tile.
3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with the joint locations; if not
coordinated, adjust latter in consultation with Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove surface - applied finishes and adhesives.
B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone and are incompatible with tile- setting materials by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy -duty wire brush.
C. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with dry-set or latex - portland cement mortars that
comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A 108 Series of tile installation standards
for installations indicated.
I. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile - setting material manufacturer's written
instructions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions.
2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Apply primer- sealer to wood and plywood subfloors when recommended by setting material
manufacturer.
E. Lay out tile patterns by marking joint lines on substrates to verify joint placement at edges, corners,
doors, and other critical elements.
I. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done.
2. Obtain Architect's approval of layout before starting tile installation. ,
F. Lay out tiles on substrates or on an adjacent surface to establish placement of individual tiles for balance
of color and pattern variations.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when layout will be done.
2. Architect may relocate specific stones with other stones of same type and will determine final
location of each the within indicated patterns.
3. Identify each tile with a temporary number marked on face of tile that coiTesponds with an
identical number marked on a layout drawing, and obtain Architect's approval before starting tile
installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385-6 1
' G. Mix tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns.
H. Orient tiles with grain direction as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
1. Expansion- and Control -Joint Installation Method: Comply with TCA EJ 171. Joint sealant materials and
installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
' J. Wipe backs of tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed.
K. Butter backs of tiles with setting material before setting, and place tiles before back buttering and setting
bed have skinned over.
L. Set individual stone tiles into setting material, taking care to maintain accurate joint alignment and
spacing. Beat -in tiles to obtain 100 percent contact between back of tile and setting material.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
' A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical joints, external corners, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2400 mm).
B_ Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6
mm in 6 m), or 112 inch (12 mm) maximum.
C. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level or
slope indicated when tested with a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge_
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed the following differences between
faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to the tiled surface:
I. Units with Natural -Cleft Faces: Depth of natural -cleft finish or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is
less.
1 DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
'
Vail, Colorado
A.
ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series of the installation standards
in "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials
and to methods indicated_
B.
TCA Installation Guidelines: Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" and TCA
installation methods indicated.
C.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering
without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
'
comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible
surfaces. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or
covers overlap tile. Where cut edges will be visible after installation, finish to match factory- fabricated
edges.
E.
Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base,
walls, and trim are the same size. Lay out tile work and center the fields in both directions in each space
or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize the cutting.
F.
Match tiles within each space by selecting tiles to achieve uniformity of color and pattern. Reject or
relocate tiles that do not match color and pattern of adjacent tiles.
' G. Mix tiles to achieve a uniformly random distribution of color shadings and patterns.
H. Orient tiles with grain direction as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
1. Expansion- and Control -Joint Installation Method: Comply with TCA EJ 171. Joint sealant materials and
installation are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
' J. Wipe backs of tiles with a damp cloth to remove dirt and dust before units are installed.
K. Butter backs of tiles with setting material before setting, and place tiles before back buttering and setting
bed have skinned over.
L. Set individual stone tiles into setting material, taking care to maintain accurate joint alignment and
spacing. Beat -in tiles to obtain 100 percent contact between back of tile and setting material.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
' A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical joints, external corners, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed
1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2400 mm).
B_ Variation in Level: For horizontal joints and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6
mm in 6 m), or 112 inch (12 mm) maximum.
C. Variation in Surface Plane of Flooring: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level or
slope indicated when tested with a 10 -foot (3 -m) straightedge_
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Units (Lipping): Do not exceed the following differences between
faces of adjacent units as measured from a straightedge parallel to the tiled surface:
I. Units with Natural -Cleft Faces: Depth of natural -cleft finish or 3/16 inch (5 mm), whichever is
less.
1 DIMENSION STONE TILE
09385-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or one -fourth of
nominal joint width, whichever is less.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace material that is stained or otherwise damaged or that does not match adjoining tile.
Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. CIean stone tiles after setting and grouting is complete; use procedures recommended by stone producer
and manufacturer for types of application indicated.
C. Apply sealer to cleaned stone tile flooring, according to sealer manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic from stone the after installation is completed for the following time periods:
. For tile set with any form of portland cement mortar, 72 hours, and allow heavy traffic only after a
minimum of 14 days' curing time.
B. Protect stone tile flooring during construction period with kraft paper or other heavy covering of type that
will not stain or discolor stone.
C_ Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective covering and clean surfaces using
procedures and materials recommended by grout and stone manufacturers.
END OF SECTION 09385
DIMENSION STONE TILE 09385 -8
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating acoustical panel ceiling installation with
hanger attachment to building structure and ceiling mounted items:
C. Samples. For each exposed finish.
D. Product test reports.
E. Research/evaluation reports.
F. Maintenance data_
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited
laboratory.
B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics:
I. Fire - Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to
those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
2. Surface - Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A
materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.
a. Smoke- Developed Index: 450 or less.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full -size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of
quantity installed.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B_ Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635,
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct
Hung," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Power - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion - resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching
hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to [10]
<Insert safety factor> times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc- coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc
coating, soft temper_
I . Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung ") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- (2.69 -
mm-) diameter wire.
E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard
n for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet
metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
2.2
ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I . Annstrong World Industries, Inc.;
2 BPB USA;
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation;
4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.;
5. Tectum Inc.;
6. USG Interiors, Inc.;
B. Color: White.
C. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (6 10 by 610 mm).
D. Provide acoustical panel ceilings tiles with exposed grid suspension system in Kitchen and Locker Room.
1. Equal to USG Interiors, Inc. "While Vinyl Stipple Pattern Gypsum Lay -in Panels Clima- Plus ".
2. 2'x 4'x Yz" square -edge panels on Donn DX grid system.
2.3
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING
A_ Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -2
s
r
�
G'
I. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;
2. BPB USA;
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation;
4. Ecophon CertainTeed, Inc.;
5. USG Interiors, Inc.;
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold - rolled steel sheet,
prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not
less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 9/16 -inch- (15 -mm -) wide metal caps on
flanges.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 INSTALLATION
J
I ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 -3
F
A.
Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written
instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite
'
edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less- than - half -width panels at borders.
C.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation
or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset
'
resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of
ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location
of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger
wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of
'
hanger wires.
I. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete
slabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs_
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where
necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more
than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling
suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and
connect securely.
E.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove
and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and
edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
END OF SECTION 09511
J
I ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511 -3
F
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1- GENERAL
L l SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resilient wall base.
3. Resilient flooring accessories.
4. Resilient carpet accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of sections of units showing the
full range of colors and patterns available for each type of product indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of
each product color and pattern specified_
' D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of resilient wall base and accessories certifying that each
product furnished complies with requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
t A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a record of
' successful in- service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to
provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work.
C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire- test - response
characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W /sq_ cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648.
2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces
to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48
hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods.
After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than
' 95 deg F (35 deg C).
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
' C. For resilient products installed on traffic surfaces, close spaces to traffic during installation and for time
period after installation recommended in writing by manufacturer_
I RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09653 - 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and
soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other finishing operations,
including painting, have been completed.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
I. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for each 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction
thereof, of each different type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
2. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products, by the manufacturers indicated in
the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule at the end of Part 3.
2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A_ Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS -W -40, Type I and with requirements specified in the
Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule.
2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Accessories: Products complying with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and
Accessory Schedule.
2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A_ Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, port Iand- cement -based formulation
provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate
conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with
Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum
moisture content_ Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation
and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation insinuctions for preparing substrates indicated
to receive resilient products.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-2
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
' Vail, Colorado
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
' cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
' manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient products. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
' A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
' B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent
' pieces aligned.
2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
' 3_ Do not stretch base daring installation.
4. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
wall base with manufacturers recommended adhesive filler material.
5. Form outside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without
whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips
perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing
more than half the wall base thickness.
' 6. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an
inverted V- shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of
base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate.
' C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive.
Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed.
' 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products:
I. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product
manufacturers.
2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.
3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product
manufacturer.
4. Damp -mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil.
B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use
protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer.
' C. Clean resilient products not more than 4 days before dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish
date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products according to manufacturer's
written recommendations.
I RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
09653-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE
A. Rubber Wall Base:
I . Manufacturer: Johnsonite; Roppe; or as indicated in the Finish Schedule.
2. Style: Cove with top -set toe for vinyl composition tile and straight with no toe for carpet.
3_ Minimum Thickness: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
4. Height: As indicated in the Finish Schedules and on the Drawings.
5. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer, but not less than 96 feet (29.26 m).
6. Outside Corners: Premolded.
7. Inside Corners: Job formed or premolded.
8. Ends: Premolded.
9. Surface: Smooth.
10. Color: As indicated in the Finish Schedules.
END OF SECTION 09653
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART i - GENERAL
I.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes carpet: see Interior Finish Schedule for Manufacturer and Product.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of
substrate required.
B_ Shop Drawings: Show the following:
I. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built -in cabinets, and locations where cutouts
are required in carpet.
2. Carpet type, color, and dye lot_
3. Locations where dye lot changes occur.
4. Scam locations, types, and methods.
S. Type of subfloor.
6. Type of installation.
7. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.
8. Pile direction.
9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
11. Transition details to other flooring materials.
12. Type of cushion.
C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample
with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and
in schedules.
1. Carpet: 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) square Sample.
2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) long Samples.
3. Carpet Cushion: 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) square Sample.
4. Carpet Seam: 6 -inch (150 -mm) Sample.
5. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) square Sample. Show carpet pattern
alignment.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the
following:
1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain - removal products and procedures
and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.
CARPET 09680-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NOR'T'H
Vail, Colorado
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated
in Pail 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6. I, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when
occupied for its intended use.
C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet
before installing these items.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights
Owner may have tinder other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and nun
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not
include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs,
and delamination.
Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion
C. Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer agreeing to
replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic, failure
of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or
compression.
I . Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
CARPET 09680-2
n
i
C
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.1 CARPET
' A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, to types of carpet indicated in the Finish Schedules and Drawings.
B. Carpet — Fitness Area, Boot Room, Retail
II CARPET
09680-3
I .
Manufacturer:
Design Origins by Shaw
2.
Contact:
Laurie Mathis 303 - 288 -3927
3.
Style:
to be determined
4.
Pattern:
to be determined
5.
Colors:
Strike off to be approved
6.
Ply:
2
7.
Construction:
Cut Pile
8.
Dye Method:
Dye Injection Print
9.
Gauge:
1 /10
10.
Stitches per Inch:
12.3
H.
Tufted Pile Height:
.312 inches
12_
Yam Weight:
40.0 ozs / sq. yd.
13.
Weight Density:
240,000
14.
Anti Soil Treatment:
Fluorocarbon
15.
Primary Backing:
Woven Polypropylene
16.
Secondary Backing:
Woven Polypropylene
17.
Warranty:
10 years
18.
Flammability:
Class I, Smoke Density less than 450
19.
Width:
12'
20.
Weight:
40 oz.
C.
Carpet with CR 10 bleach and stain resistant treatment and MP moisture protective backing.
D.
Install
per manufacturer's and installer's recommendations.
E.
Carpe(— Existing Units
I .
Provide an allowance of 540
/sy over entire unit area for Existing Units.
2.2
INSTALLATION
ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching
Compounds: Latex - modified, hydraulic- cement -based formulation
provided
by or recommended by
the following:
1.
Carpet manufacturer.
B.
Smooth Transition Strip
1.
Manufacturer:
Schluter
2.
Contact:
800- 472 -4588
3.
Style Number:
Reno -TK or Reno -U
4.
Finish:
Brushed Stainless Steel
5.
Location:
Between carpeted areas and adjacent areas
6.
Flooring Contractor to select among various sizes to accommodate different heights in stone
flooring and carpeted areas.
II CARPET
09680-3
C.
D.
E.
F.
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
Adhesives: Water - resistant, mildew- resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions
indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by
the following:
1. Carpet manufacturer.
Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for
taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water- resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion
thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of height required to protect exposed edge of
carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
B.
3.2
A.
B.
C.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance.
Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements
specified.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that
may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing
bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:
a. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet
installation_
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods
recommended in writing by the following:
Carpet manufacturer.
CARPET 09680-4
C
AI
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning,
examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Stretch -in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Stretch -in Installation."
B. Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs."
C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet;
maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in
closed position.
1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears.
D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built -in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by
carpet manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open- bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:
1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by
carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face - beater element.
B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."
C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in
writing by carpet manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09640
I CARPET
09680-5
II
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panel wall covering for Boot Room Walls as indicated on Drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall- covering type. Indicate pattern placement, seams
and termination points_
C. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, texture, and pattern required.
D. Maintenance data.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide wall coverings and adhesives with the following fire -test-
response characteristics as determined by testing identical products applied with identical adhesives to
substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Surface - Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84:
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
I. Rolls of Wall- Covering Material: Full -size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed_
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in Part 2 "Wall- Covering Products" Article.
WALL COVERINGS 09720- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 WALL - COVERING PRODUCTS
A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from the same run number or dye lot.
B. Fiberglass reinforced plastic panel (FRP) Wall Covering on Boot Room Walls:
1. Provide FRP panels equal to USG "Marlite" (color: Beige for LascoBoard) on all kitchen walls,
floor to ceiling_
2. Provide all trim and accessories for a complete installation, including corner protection, seam
covers, and counterflashing at cove base.
3. Coordinate installation with all rough -ins for Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing , Fire
Protection, , fixtures, devices and receptacles.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew - resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and
substrate application, as recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer.
B. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall- covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound
coatings, cracks, and defects.
1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units
when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity.
3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal primer.
4. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finishes with
fine sandpaper.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar
items_
C. Acclimatize wall - covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less
than 24 hours before installation_
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Cut wall - covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.
B. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.
C. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage.
WALL COVERINGS 09720-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside comers and 6 inches (150 mm)
from inside comers unless a change of pattern or color exists at comer. No horizontal seams are
permitted.
E. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
F. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any
overlay or spacing between strips.
END OF SECTION 09720
WALL COVERINGS 09720-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
' PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following:
I . Exposed exterior items and surfaces.
2. Exposed interior items and surfaces.
3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
' B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be
painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface,
paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules
indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color
coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory- finished components:
' a. Architectural woodwork and casework.
b. Acoustical wall panels.
c. Metal toilet enclosures.
d. Metal lockers.
e. Unit kitchens.
f. Elevator entrance doors and frames.
g. Elevator equipment_
h. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
i. Light fixtures.
j. Distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas_
c. Ceiling plenums.
d. Utility tunnels.
e. Pipe spaces.
f. Duct shafts.
S. Elevator shafts_
3. Finished metal surfaces inciudc the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
d. Copper_
PAINTING 09900-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
e. Bronze and brass.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages.
C. Sensing devices.
d. Motor and fan shafts.
5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -
required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. General: The standard procedure for measuring specular gloss is contained in ASTM D 523.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-
degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
4. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at
a 60- degree meter.
5. Full gloss refers to high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A_ Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers.
Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and
cross - reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
2. Manufacturers Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for
use.
B. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each
type of finish -coat material indicated.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color,
and texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample_ Label each sample for
location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only:
PAINTING 09900-2
1
1
t
j
1
1
t
1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Concrete: Provide two 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) square samples for each color and finish.
b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch (100 -by- 200 -mm) samples of masonry, with
mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color.
C. Painted Wood: Provide two 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) square samples of each color and
material on hardboard.
d_ Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4 -by -8 -inch (100 -by- 200 -mm) samples of natural -
or stained -wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) square samples of flat metal and two fl-
inch- (200 -mm -) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system
applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful
in- service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from
the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Field Quality Control:
I . Review of first finished room, space, or item of each color scheme is required by Architect for
color, texture, and workmanship.
2. Use first acceptable roan, space or item as Project standard for each color scheme.
3. For spray application, paint surface not smaller than 100 square feet as Project standard.
D. Secondary products not specified by name and required for the job such as shellac shall be "best grade"
or "first line" products.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
I . Product name or title of material.
2_ Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and dale of manufacture.
4_ Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
I I PAINTING
09900-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum ambient
temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg Q. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
I. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and
health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A_ Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg Q.
B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at
temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish Owner clean, new, one -quart cans of paints used on the Project, well marked, indicating
location of each color and type material used. One can if less than 1,000 square feet, two cans if over
1,000 square feet covered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Provide one of the products in the paint schedules_
B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of
shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses:
I . Carboline Company (Carboline)
2. 1C1 Dulux Paints -Devoe Coatings (ICI)
3. Kwal•Howells, Inc (K•H).
4. Benjamin Moore & Company (Moore).
5. The Sherwin- Williams Company (S -W).
6. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
C Materials selected for coating systems for each type of surface shall be the product of a single
manufacturer.
PAINTING 09900-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by
acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
B. No claim as to the unsuitability or unavailability of any material specified, or unwillingness to use
specified products, or inability to produce first -class work with specified products, will be entertained.
C. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that
are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,
as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
D. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best- quality trade sales paint material of the various
coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification
will not be acceptable.
E. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard
colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be
performed for compliance with paint application requirements.
I. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of
the total system for various substrates. On request, famish information on characteristics of finish
materials to ensure use of compatible primers_
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates
primed by others.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because
of the size or weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
I. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that
could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
PAINTING 09900-5
r
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not
fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -
fiber- reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers
have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
3. Use abrasive blast- cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
4. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this
condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that
permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching
cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow
to dry, and vacuum before painting.
6. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
7. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in
finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
& Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces,
undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
9. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
10. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction
occurs on backside.
11. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer
immediately on delivery.
12. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances_ Use solvent or
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC)
recommendations.
13.
14.
PAINTING
Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to
requirements of SSPC -SP 10.
Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before
priming.
09900-6
1
1
1
1
r
J
1
1
t
t
j
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
15. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire - brush, clean
with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the
shop coat_
16. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is
free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
_ materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats
of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide
sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques
best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
I . Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, nist, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures,
convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place.
Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired
protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces.
Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces_
8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field - finished casework to match exterior.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vanish coat.
I PAINTING
09900-7
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer_ If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to
manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.
2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure
edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to
that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces
until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or
lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I . Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use bnish of appropriate size
for the surface or item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed
in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Heat exchangers.
3_ "ranks.
4. Ductwork.
5. Insulation.
6. Motors and mechanical equipment.
7_ Accessory items.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Conduit and fittings.
2. Switchgear.
PAINTING 09900-8
r
1
F1
Ij
1
1
1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3. Panelboards.
H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with
pores filled.
1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first
coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque
surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass- smooth surface film of even luster.
Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or
other surface imperfections.
L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or
repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint
materials from the site.
I. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by
washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings
provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.
I . At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P I.
3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. The following schedule for finishing is not intended to mention every particular item which will receive
painter's finish. The kinds of paint and number of coats required on the various surfaces shall be as
scheduled.
3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop - primed items.
1. Semi - Gloss: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Synthetic rust- inhibiting primer.
PAINTING 09900-9
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
M.
1)
ICI:
Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer.
2)
K•H:
9210 Rust Inhibiting Metal Primer
3)
Moore:
Alkyd Metal Primer M06.
4)
S -W:
Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZI.
b. First and Second Coats: Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex.
1)
ICI:
2406 Decra- Shield Exterior Semi - Gloss.
2)
K•H:
3200 Acrylic Latex Semi -Gloss
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim #170.
4)
S -W:
A -100 Latex House and Trim Paint A82 Series.
2. High Performance Semi -Gloss Urethane: One finish coat over primer.
a. Primer: Synthetic rust- inhibiting primer, I to 2 DFT.
1)
Carboline:
Rustbond LTR Primer.
2)
ICI:
Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer.
3)
K•H:
VyGuard V13 -F -28.
4)
Moore:
Universal Metal Primer M06.
5)
S -W:
KemKKromik Universal Metal Primer B50WZ1.
6)
Tnemec:
ChemPrime 37H.
b. Finish Coat: Semi -Gloss Urethane, 3 to 4 mils DFT.
I)
Carboline:
133HB.
2)
ICI:
Devthane 378 Aliphatic Urethane Semi - Gloss.
3)
K•H:
VyGuard V41.
4)
Moore:
M741M75 Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Semi- Gloss.
5)
S -W:
Acrolon 218 HS B65 -650 Series
6)
Tnemec:
Endura Series 73.
Galvanized Metal:
2
Paint System Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
I) ICI:
3210 Ultra -Hide Aquacrylic Gripper.
2) K *H:
5800 100% Acrylic Primer.
3) Moore:
Fresh Start #023
4) S -W:
DTM Primer Finish B66W 1.
b. First and Second Coats: Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel.
I) )CL
2406 Decra - Shield Exterior Semi- Gloss.
2) Kali:
3200 Acrylic Latex Semi - Gloss.
3) Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim # 170.
4) S -W:
A -100 Latex House and Trim Paint A82 Series.
High Performance Semi -Gloss Urethane: Two Finish coats over primer_
a. Primer: Synthetic rust- inhibiting primer, I to 2 DFT.
PAINTING 09900-10
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1)
Carboline:
Rustbond LTR Primer.
2)
ICI:
Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer.
3)
K•H:
VyGuard V13-F-28.
4)
Moore:
Universal Metal Primer M07
5)
S -W:
KemKromik Universal Metal Primer B50WZ1.
6)
Tnemec:
ChemPrime 37H.
b. Finish Coat: Semi -Gloss Urethane, 3 to 4 mils DFT.
I )
Carboline:
133HB.
2)
ICI:
Devthanc 378 Aliphatic Urethane Semi - Gloss.
3)
K•H:
VyGuard V41 _
4)
Moore:
M74IM75 Aliphatic Acrylic Urethane Semi - Gloss.
5)
S -W:
Acrolon 218 HS B65 -650 Series.
6)
Tnemec:
Endura Series 73
3. Heat - Resistant, Enamel Coating:
For surface temperatures up to 400 degrees F (204 degrees C).
Two finish coats over primer.
a. Primer Coat: Manufacturer's recommended metal primer.
I)
ICI.
HT -10 Modified Silicone Black.
2)
K•H:
No primer required.
3)
Moore:
No primer required.
4)
S -W:
No primer required.
5)
Tnemec:
No primer required.
b. First
and Second Coats: Heat- resistant Enamel.
1)
ICI:
HT -10 Modified Silicone Black.
2)
K•H:
VyGuard Hi -Heat Silicone Coating 374 -I, Black.
3)
Moore:
High Heat Coating Black M66 -80
4)
S -W:
Kem H;Temp heat Flex 11450.
5)
Tnemec:
Series 39 -661 Silicone Aluminum.
4. Heat - Resistant
Coating: For surface temperatures up to 1000 degrees F (538 degrees C)_
Provide two coats.
a. First
and Second Coats: Aluminum- pigmented, silicone -based heat - resistant coating.
1)
ICI:
HT -10 Modified Silicone Aluminum.
2)
K•H:
VyGuard High Heat Silicone Coating 37 -F -2, Zinc
Dust Gray.
3)
Moore:
High Heat Coating Aluminum M66 -78
4)
S -W:
Hi -Heat Silicone Alkyd Aluminum, B59S8.
C. Concrete and Concrete
—based siding:
I . Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: Two coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. First
and Second Coats: Exterior
acrylic emulsion.
1)
ICI:
Decra- Shield 2200 Exterior Flat.
2)
K•H:
6400 Accu -Tone 100% Acrylic Flat Finish.
I I PAINTING
09900-11
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado '
3) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint # 171.
4) S -W: A -100 Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish
A -6 Series_
3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Ferrous Metal:
I . Semi -Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5
mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, quick - drying, rust- inhibiting primer.
1)
ICI:
Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer.
2)
K•H:
9210 Metal Primer.
3)
Moore:
Alkyd Metal Primer M06.
4)
S -W:
Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50NZ ^ /B50WZI.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
f
I)
]CL
1120 Ultra -Hide Oil /Alkyd Undercoat.
2)
K•H:
4200 Alkyd Undercoat.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and Primer
Sealer #245
4)
S -W:
Prep -Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2.
C. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi - Gloss, Alkyd.
I }
ICI:
1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi- Gloss.
2)
K•H:
4600 Accu -Pro Semigloss Enamel.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -gloss Enamel #271
4)
S -W:
ProMar 200 Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel B34W200.
2. Two- Component
Waterborne Epoxy
Coating, Gloss Finish:
a. Primer: Waterbome epoxy.
1)
ICI:
True- Glaze -WB 4030 Waterborne Epoxy Primer.
2)
K•H:
5800 Acrylic Primer.
3)
Moore:
Waterborne Epoxy Primer M08 /M09.
4)
S -W:
Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy Primer B70W 100.
b. First and Second Coats:
Waterbome epoxy gloss coating.
1)
ICI:
True- Glaze -WB 4408 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss.
2)
K•H
3110 Waterborne Catalyzed Epoxy.
3)
Moore:
Acrylic Epoxy Gloss Coating M431M44
4)
S -W:
Water -Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70 /B60V25.
B. Galvanized Metal:
I . Semi -Gloss
Finish: Two finish coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5
mils.
PAINTING
09900-12
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
1)
ICI:
Devguard 4160 Tank and Structural Primer.
2)
K•H:
5860 All- Purpose Primer_
3)
Moore:
Fresh Start #023
4)
S -W:
Galvite HS B50WZ30.
b. Undercoat: Interior enamel
undercoat.
1)
ICI:
1120 Ultra -Hide Oil /Alkyd Undercoat.
2)
K•H:
4200 Undercoater.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and
Primer Sealer #245.
4)
S -W:
Prep -Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2.
C. Finish Coat: Interior, semi - gloss, low -odor, alkyd enamel.
1)
ICI:
1516 Ultra -Hide Alkyd Semi - Gloss.
2)
K•H:
4600 Acc -Pro Semigloss Enamel.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel 4271
4)
S -W:
ProMar 200 Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel B34W200 Series.
C. Concrete (Where scheduled Epoxy Paint):
1. Two- component, Polyamide -Epoxy Coating System with gloss finish.
a. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended undercoat.
1) ICI: True -Glaze 4508 Chemical Resistant Epoxy.
2) K•H: 9100 Epoxy Enamel.
3) Moore: Polyamide Epoxy Gloss Coating M36/M37
4) S -W: 'file -Clad High Solids Epoxy B62Z Series.
b. Second Coal: High - performance, polyamide -epoxy coating.
t) ICI: True -Glaze 4508 Chemical Resistant Epoxy.
2) K•H: 9100 Epoxy Enamel.
3) Moore: Polyamide Epoxy Gloss Coating M36/M37
4) S -W: Tile -Clad High Solids Epoxy B62Z Series.
D. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU):
1. Semi - Gloss, Acrylic Latex Finish: Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not
less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler: High - performance latex block filler.
I) ICI: Bloxfil 4000 Heavy Duty Filler.
2) K•H: 5890 Accu -Pro Acrylic Block Filler.
3) Moore: Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler #285.
4) S -W: ProMar Interior /Exterior Block Filler B25W25.
b. Primer: Interior Latex Primer:
I I PAINTING
09900-13
E.
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1) ICI:
1416 Ultra -Hide Interior Semi-Gloss-
2) K•H:
2300 Accu -Tone Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel.
3) Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. #276
4) S -W:
ProMar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss B31 W200.
C. Finish Coat: Interior, Semi - Gloss, Low -Odor, Acrylic Latex:
1) ICI:
1416 Ultra -Hide Interior Semi - Gloss.
2) K•H:
2300 Accu -Tone Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel.
3) Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel. #276.
4) S -W:
ProMar 200 Latex Semi -Gloss B31 W200.
2. Two- Component, Epoxy Emulsion Coating with Gloss Finish: Provide two finish coats of gloss,
epoxy emulsion over concrete masonry block filler.
a. Filler Coat: Concrete masonry block filler.
I) ICI:
Bloxfi14000 Heavy Duty Filler.
2) K•H:
5890 Acrylic Block Filler.
3) Moore:
Moorcraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler 9285
4) S -W:
Heavy Duty Block Filler B42W46.
5) Tnemec:
130 -6601 Environftll_
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss, Epoxy Emulsion.
1) ICI:
True - Glaze -WB 4408 Waterborne Epoxy Gloss.
2) K•H:
3110 Waterbome Catalyzed Epoxy.
3) S -W:
Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy, B70 Series /1360V 15.
4) Moore:
Acrylic Epoxy Gloss Coating M431M44
5) Tnemec:
Series 113 H.B. Tneme- Tufcoat.
Gypsum Board Systems:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish:
Two coats.
a. Primer: White, interior, latex
-based printer_
1) ICI:
1030 Ultra -Hide PVA Interior Primer.
2) K•H:
0890 Sandable Drywall Primer.
3) Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and
Printer Sealer. #253
4) S -W:
PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer 1328W200.
b_ Finish Coat: Interior, fla(,
latex -based paint.
1) ICI:
1210 Ultra -Hide Interior Fiat.
2) K•H:
IS I Accu -Tone Latex Flat.
3) Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Flat #275.
4) S -W:
ProMar 200 Latex Fiat B30W200.
2. Acrylic Latex Egg -Shell Enamel:
Two finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not
less than 3.5 mils.
a. Primer:
PAINTING
09900-14
u
1
1 !�
I[
I I PAINTING
09900- 15
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1)
ICI:
1030 Ultra -Hide PVA Interior Primer.
2)
K•H:
0890 sandable drywall primer_
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and
Primer Sealer. #253
4)
S -W:
PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
b. First and
Second Coats:
1)
ICI:
1412 Ultra -Hide Interior Eggshell.
2)
K•H:
1903 Accu -Pro Eggshell.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Egg -Shell Enamel #274.
4)
S -W:
ProMar 200 Latex Eg -Shell B20W200.
3. Low -Odor Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness not less
than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: White, interior,
latex -based primer.
1)
2)
ICI:
K•H:
1030 Ultra -Hide PVA Interior Primer.
0890 sandable drywall primer.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and
Primer Sealer. #253.
4)
S -W:
PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer 828W200.
b. First and Second Coats:
Interior, Semi - Gloss, Low -Odor, Alkyd Enamel.
1)
ICI:
1516 Ultra -Hide Interior Alkyd Semi - GIoss.
'
2)
K•H:
4600 Accu -Pro Semigloss Enamel.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel #271.
4)
S -W:
ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss B34W200.
4. Nigh - Performance,
Polyamide -Epoxy
Coating System: Provide two coats with total dry film
thickness not less than 4 mils.
a. Base Coat: Manufacturer's recommended undercoat.
)
ICI:
Ultra -Hide 3210 Aquacrylic Gripper.
2)
K•H:
0890 sandable drywall primer.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater and
Primer Sealer. #253
4)
S -W:
PropRite 200 Latex Wall Primer.
5)
Tnemec:
51 -792 PVA Sealer.
b. First and Second Coats:
High - performance, polyamide -epoxy coating_
1)
ICI:
True -Glaze 4508 Chemical Resistant Epoxy.
2)
K•H:
9100 Epoxy Enamel.
3)
Moore:
Polyamide Epoxy Gloss Coating M36/M37.
4)
S -W:
Tile -Clad HS Epoxy B62Z Series.
5)
Tnemec:
Series 66.
F. Woodwork and Hardboard:
I _ Semi -Gloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
I I PAINTING
09900- 15
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
x
1)
ICI:
1120 Ultra -Hide Oil /Alkyd Undercoat.
2)
K•H:
4200 Alkyd Undercoat
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and
Primer Sealer. #245.
4)
S -W:
Prep -Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, Semi - Gloss, Low -Odor, Alkyd Enamel.
t)
ICI:
1516 Ultra -Hide Interior Alkyd Semi - Gloss.
2)
K•H:
4600 Accu -Pro Semigloss Enamel.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel #271
4)
S -W:
ProMar 200 Alkyd Semi -Gloss B34W200..
2. Full -Gloss Enamel Finish: Three
coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
1)
ICI:
1020 Ultra -Hide Oil /Alkyd Undercoat.
2)
K•H:
4200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Undercoater and
Primer Sealer. #245.
- 4)
S -W:
Prep -Rite Wall & Wood Primer B49W2.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
I )
ICI:
2518 Ultra -Hide Durus Alkyd Gloss
2)
K•H:
9800 Accu -Pro Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
3)
Moore:
Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel M22.
4)
S -W:
Industrial Enamel 13 -54 Series.
Stained Woodwork:
I. Stained- Varnish
Rubbed Finish:
Three finish coats over stain plus filler on open -grain wood.
Wipe filler before applying first varnish
coat.
a. Stain Coat: Oil -type interior
wood stain.
t)
ICI:
1700 Woodpride Finishing Stain.
2)
K•H:
8709 Semi- Transparent Stain.
3)
Moore:
Benwood Penetrating Stain 4234.
4)
S -W:
WoodClassics Oil Stain A48 -200 Series.
b_ First Coat: Sealer.
I )
ICI:
1908 Woodpride Polyurethane Gloss.
2)
K•H:
Woodkraft Sealer 4048.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Sanding Sealer #267.
4)
S -W:
WoodClassics Fast Dry Sealer B26V43.
C. Filler
Coat: Paste wood filler for open grain woods.
I)
K•H:
Old Master's Paste Wood Filler.
PAINTING
09900- 16
t
1
Ll
1
j
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2)
Moore:
Benwood Wood Grain Filler #238.
3)
S -W:
Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler_
d. Second and Third Coats:
Oil rubbing varnish.
1)
ICI:
1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin
2)
K•H:
Woodkraft Satin Varnish.
3)
Moore:
Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.
4)
S -W:
WoodClassics Varnish G 1 A66 -300 Series..
H. Natural- Finish Woodwork:
1. Rubbed Varnish Finish: Two
finish coats over sealer plus filler on open -grain wood.
a. First
Coat: Sealer_
1)
ICI:
1908 Woodpride Polyurethane Gloss.
2)
K•H:
Woodkraft Sealer 4048.
3)
Moore:
Moorcraft Super Spec Sanding Sealer #413.
4)
S -W:
Wood Classics Fast Dry Sealer B26V43.
b. Filler
Coat: Paste wood filler for open grain woods.
I )
KPH:
OId Master's Paste Wood Filler.
2)
Moore:
Benwood Paste Wood Filler #238.
3)
S -W:
Sher -Wood Fast -Dry Filler.
C. Second and Third Coats:
Oil rubbing varnish.
1)
ICI:
1902 Woodpride Polyurethane Satin.
2)
K•H:
Woodkraft SatinVarnish.
3)
Moore:
Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404.
4)
S -W:
WoodClassics Varnish Gloss A66 -300 Series.
END OF SECTION 09900
I I PAINTING
09900-17
1�
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet compartments and screens as follows:
I . Type: Powder - coated steel.
2. Compartment Style: Floor anchored.
3. Screen Style: Floor anchored or wall hung.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of
construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and
fastenings.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
I. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment - mounted toilet accessories.
C. Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6 -inch-
(150 -mm -) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
13 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
I . Capitol Partitions, Inc.
2. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
3. Global Steel Products Corp.
4. Hadrian Inc.
5. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
6. Metpar Corp.
7. Santana Products, Inc.
8. Young Sales Corp.; DesignRite.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed
surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core
material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable.
B. Powder- coated steel Units: Facing sheets and closures fabricated from ASTM A 591/A 591M,
(electrolytically zinc- coated) or ASTM A 6531A 653M (hot -dip galvanized or galvannealed), commercial
steel sheet for exposed applications, that is mill phosphatized, and selected for smoothness.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard pigmented, organic coating.
a. Color: Black.
2. Pilasters (Braced): 0.0500 inch (1.3 mm).
3. Panels and Screens: 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm).
4. Doors: 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm).
5. Tapping Reinforcement: 0.0781 inch (2.0 mm).
C. Provide all installation hardware, trim, and accessories for a complete installation, including robe
hook on back of doors and stainless steel shoes on pilasters.
D. Core Material for Metal -Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound - deadening honeycomb of resin -
impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of I inch (25 mm) minimum
for doors, panels, and screens and 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) minimum for pilasters.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Powder- coated steel, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) thick and 3
inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware.
F. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U- brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and
pilasters of the following material:
1. Material: Powder- coated steel.
G_ Full- Height (Continuous) Brackets for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching
panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material:
I. Material: Powder - coated steel.
H_ Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy -duty operating hardware and
accessories of the following material:
I . Material: Powder- coated steel.
1. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome- plated
steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft- resistant -type heads. Provide hex -type bolts for
through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized or other rust - resistant,
protective- coated steel.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system.
Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment - mounted hardware, accessories, and
grab bars, as indicated.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155-2
' LlON SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment - mounted hardware, accessories,
' and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Metal -Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material
and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal comers by welding
or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth.
C. Floor- Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion- resistant anchoring
assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for
structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
D. Wall -Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same constriction and finish as compartment
' panels, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Provide V- shaped, metal -faced screens with manufacturers standard sound - deadening core
material bonded to inner surface of face sheets. Provide metal top and bottom caps. Fabricate
screens to form unit that is a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide at wall and 1 inch (25 mm)
' wide at its protruding end. Provide complete with concealed anchoring devices for attachment to
wall and mechanical leveling adjustment.
' E. Floor- Anchored Screens: Provide pilasters and panels of same construction and finish as toilet
compartments. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion - resistant anchoring assemblies complete with
threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor.
Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
1 F. Doors: Provide custom wood doors as specified in Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors ":
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's self - closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to
' 90 degrees_
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface - mounted latch unit with combination rubber-
faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with
' accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be
handicapped accessible.
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber- tipped bumper, sized to
prevent door from hitting compartment- mounted accessories.
' 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber- tipped bumpers at out - swinging doors or entrance
screen doors.
5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction at out - swinging doors_ Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
' 2.4 SHEET STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical Finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipment.
t
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
10155-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
'
PART 3- EXECUTION
for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from
closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out - swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to
I
3.1 INS'T'ALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instnictions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb,
'
and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch (13 nun) between pilasters and panels and not
I
more than I inch (25 mm) between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's
recommended anchoring devices.
I. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and
bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints.
Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
'
B_ Floor- Anchored Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (50
mm) into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb,
and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors
'
are in closed position.
C. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit
supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
'
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
I
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions
for proper operation. Set hinges on in- swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from
closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out - swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to
I
return to fully closed position.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without
damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
I
END OF SECTION 10155 1
n
�
�I
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-4
t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
I. Fixed, extruded- aluminum louvers.
1. Prefrnished chimney caps..
11 1A
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this
Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high,
identical to that provided_
C. Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water penetration through a louver 48 inches
(1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high, identical to that provided.
D. Drainable -Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of
-gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and
stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver
components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle
or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors.
I. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 Ibf /sq. ft. (1440 Pa), acting inward or
outward_
2. Thernmal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental effects:
a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),
material surfaces.
B. Air - Performance, Water- Penetration, and Air- Leakage Ratings: Provide louvers complying with
performance requirements indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturers stock units 48 inches
(1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 nun) high. Test units according to AMCA 500.
l . Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
2_ Perform eater- penetration testing on louvers without screens.
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
� I LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-1
L
1. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Stmetural Welding Code -- Aluminum." ,
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations '
for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Fixed, Extruded- Aluminum louvers
a. Airolile Co.; Louver Model CB605D, S' Horizontal Front Drainage Continuous Blade
Appearance. '
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Air Conditioning Louvers — 30 Blade 0292/0291
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B.
Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories. Include plans; elevations; sections; and details
showing profiles, angles, and spacing of louver blades. Show unit dimensions related to wall openings
and construction; free area for each size indicated; profiles of frames at jambs, heads, and sills; and
'
anchorage details and locations.
C.
Samples for Verification: Of each type of metal finish required, prepared on Samples of same thickness
and material indicated for final Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations,
include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
D.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of louvers certifying that the products furnished comply
i
with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500
and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program.
E.
Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of products with requirements based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents through one source from a single manufacturer where alike
in one or more respects regarding type, design, or factory- applied color finish.
'
B.
Welding Standards: As follows:
1. Comply with AWS D1.2, "Stmetural Welding Code -- Aluminum." ,
2. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.
C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations '
for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS I
A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delaying the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established
dimensions.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Fixed, Extruded- Aluminum louvers
a. Airolile Co.; Louver Model CB605D, S' Horizontal Front Drainage Continuous Blade
Appearance. '
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Air Conditioning Louvers — 30 Blade 0292/0291
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-2
1
2.2 MATERIALS
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
A_ Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), alloy 6063 -T5 or T-52.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/13 26M, alloy 319.
F. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise
indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
G. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use
nonferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as
needed for corrosion resistance_ Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-3
H.
Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12 but containing no
asbestos fibers, or cold - applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
'
A_
Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
'
I. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling
limitations, fabricate units to permit field- bolted assembly with close - fitting joints in jambs and
mullions, reinforced with splice plates and without interrupting blade- spacing pattern.
'
B.
Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to
produce uniform appearance.
C.
Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for
'
fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
D.
Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.
E.
Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than recommended by
manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c_, whichever is less. At horizontal joints between louver units,
provide horizontal mullions, unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.
F.
Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view,
'
unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members
necessary.
G.
Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or
both, as standard with louver manufacturer, concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of
louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.4
FIXED, EXTRUDED - ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A.
Louver Construction: Provide fixed -blade louvers with extruded - aluminum frames and blades.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
B.
C.
D
2.7
A.
B_
2.8
A.
FIXED, FORMED -METAL LOUVERS
Louver Construction: Provide fixed -blade louvers with frames and blades formed from metal sheet of
metal indicated.
LOUVER SCREENS
General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying with the following requirements:
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening, unless otherwise indicated.
Secure screens to louver frames with stainless -steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150
mm) from each comer and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.
Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated and to
comply with the following requirements:
Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.
a. Reinforce extruded - aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.
2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.
Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As follows:
I. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm -) square mesh, 0.063- inch.(1.6 -mm) wire.
FINISHES, GENERAL
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
Finish louvers after assembly.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for
designating aluminum finishes.
High - Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA- C12C42RIx (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited
chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid - chromate- fluoride - phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating
and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
I. Fluoropolymer Two -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard hvo -coat, thermocured
system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropoiymer color topcoat
containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with
AAMA 605.2.
2.. Color and Gloss:
a_ Kynar 500 color as selected by Architect from manufacturers custom color range.
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 -4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORT14
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to Project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required
to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C_ Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence
remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make
required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
' F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous -metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy
coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar
metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where
weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants
applied during louver installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering to
remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to
finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.
C_ Protect louvers and vents from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where
needed and approved by louver manufacturer_ Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial
Completion_
D. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of
corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged
units and replace with new units_
l . Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air -dried coating that matches color and gloss
of, and is compatible with, factory- applied finish coating.
END OF SECTION 10200
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10265 - IMPACT - RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION
PART]- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall guards_
2. Corner guards.
3. Impact- resistant wall coverings.
B. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates_
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.
C. Samples: For each type of unit and for each color and texture required.
D. Maintenance data.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of impact - resistant wall - protection units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
I. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
I _ Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
IMPACT - RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTNI B 22 1 (ASTM B 221 M).
B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal; security -type
where exposed to view.
D. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to
substrate indicated.
1. Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g /L.
C. Contact Adhesive: 250 g /L.
2.3 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface- Mounted, Metal Comer Guards: Fabricated from I - piece, formed or extruded metal
with formed edges; with 90- or 135- degree turn to match wall condition.
I . Available Manufacturers:
a. American Floor Products Co., Inc.
b. ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc.
C. Basco, Inc.
d. Boston Retail Products.
e. Construction Specialties, Inc.
f. 1PC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
g. Pawling Corporation.
2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch 0.6 mm).
b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4
3. Wing Size: Nominal 2- 1 1/2 I) 2-J i2 inches (65 by 65 Inm)_
4_ Corner Radius: 1/h inch (3 mm).
5. Mounting: A combination of oval -head, countersunk screws through factory - drilled
mounting holes, double- faced, adhesive foam tape and adhesive to suit the substrate
material to achieve the maximum bond strength.
IMPACT- RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 -2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3-1 INSTALLATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact - resistant wall -
protection system components.
B. Install impact- resistant wall - protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.
Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in
the finished Work.
1. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a
complete installation.
C. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a
standard, ammonia - based, household cleaning agent.
D. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10265
IMPACT- RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265-3
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10300— PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES
PART I GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Prefabricated gas fireplaces.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. WH (CERT) - Certification Listings; Warnock Hersey.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gas Fireplaces: A.G.A. /C.G.A. approved for natural or LP gas.
B. Gas Log Sets: A.G.A. /C.G.A approved for natural or LP gas.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 300.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and installation instructions.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver to Owner manufacturer's recommended printed operation
and maintenance procedures.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect products upon receipt to ensure products are free from damage occurring in transit.
B. Store products in covered area, well protected from weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT
A. Manufacturer and Product: Model 613600.
B. Provide accessories as follows::
1. Venting: B -vent from back or top as required for retro- fitting into each unit. Field verify prior
to ordering.
2. Trim Kit: Black.
3. Fan Unit: Yes.
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10300 -1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
4. Wall Switch: Yes.
5. Log Kit: As selected by Architect.
6. BTU rating: 25,000.
2.2 FIREPLACE SCHEDULE
A. EXISTING UNITS
I. Replacements (20)
a. Mfr.- Napolean
b. Model # - G 13600
C. Btu - 24,000
d. Size - 43 1 /2" x 27 1/2"
e. Type - zero clearance, gas appliance, fixed glass, natural gas
f. Flue - replace B vent flue
2. End Units plus McIntyre (7)
a. Mfr. - Town and Country
b. Model # - TC54 Series C
C. Btu - 90,000
d. Size - 54"
C. Type - gas appliance, fixed glass
f. Flue - B vent flue
g. Gas Log/Burner - Real Fyre, Glowing Ember Burner (G4 series) 30 ", Split Oak Designer
Plus Iogs (SDP series) 36" (90,000 btu)
B. NEW UNITS
1. Living Rooms (provide venting only)
a. Mfr. - Town and Country
b. Model # - TC54 Series C
c_ Btu - 100,000
d. Size - 54"
e. Type - open front, gas log
f. Flue - B vent flue
g. Gas Log /Burner - Real Fyre, Glowing Ember Burner (G4 series) 30 ", Split Oak Designer
Phis logs (SDP series) 36" (90,000 btu)
2. Master Bedrooms (provide venting only)
a. Mfr. - Town and Country, or Napolean GD80
b. Model # - TC42 Series
C. Btu - 50,000
d_ Size - 42"
e. Type - glass front, gas appliance
f. Flue - direct vent
g. Gas Log /Burner - Real Fyre, Glowing Ember Bumer (65 series) 16 ", Split Oak Designer
Plus logs (SDP series) 22" (55,000 b(u)
PART 3 EXECUTION
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10300 -2
1
1
1
t
0
[J
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
' Vail, Colorado
3.1 EXAMINATION
r A. Verify that dimensions are correct and substrate is in proper condition for installation. Do not
proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approval listings.
B. No deviations or modifications are acceptable.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust components for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 10300
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES 10300 -3
1
FIREPLACE
Fireplace Box
To be determined
Replacement box will be paid for by the developer
Upgrade replacement box will be availabe_ Additonal cost over the developer
provided product would be at the owners cost
Fireplace Mantel
Material:
Style:
Species and finish to match trim package
8" x 8" full width wood beam
Fireplace Surround—
For Color Scheme A and B
Source:
Robinson Rock
Material :
Thin Stone Veneer
Pattern:
Oldmill
As required by Structural engineer, stone height will be limited to mantle height
Fireplace Surround—
For Color Scheme C and D
Source:
Robinson Rock
Material :
Thin Stone Veneer
Pattern:
Kiamichi
As required by Structural engineer, stone height will be limited to mantle height
Fireplace Mantel
Material:
Style:
Species and finish to match trim package
8" x 8" full width wood beam
li
1
7
1
r
Fireplace Stone
Color Scheme C and D
OldmillTM
1
Fireplace Stone
Color Scheme A and B
KiamichiTM
1
1
C
t
SECTION 10425 - SIGNS
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes
1. Interior Panel signs.
2. Exterior dimensional letters and numbers.
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations showing mounting
heights from floor level, and large -scale sections of typical members and other components. Show
anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large -scale details of wording and lettering
layout.
2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit
of Work in other Sections.
3. Provide a signage schedule for each floor.
4. Provide message list for each sign required, including large -scale details of wording and lettering
layout_
5. Furnish full -size rubbings for metal plaques.
6. Provide scaled drawing of cast letters showing building elevation in background. Accurately
show actual letter height, mounting height and spacing between letters.
C. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for selection of color, pattern and
surface lexture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
I . Samples for selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a. Manufacturer's standard range of available signage frame selections.
2. Attachment methods /systems for selection by Architect.
3. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements
indicated:
a. Panel Signs: Actual sign sample demonstrating colors indicated.
b. Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color, on 6- inch -long sections of extrusions
and not less than 4 -inch squares of sheet or plate. Where finishes involve normal color and
texture variations, include sample sets showing the fiill range of variations expected.
C. Dimensional Letters: Provide full -size representative samples of each dimensional letter
type required, showing letter style, color, and material finish and method of attachment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ADA Requirements: Provide interior signage in compliance with "Article III of the Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA)" for handicapped accessibility requirements. Building signage identifying
permanent rooms and spaces, provide with "Grade 2 Braille" and letters raised minimum of 1/32-inch-
' SIGNS
10425-1
2.2 MATERIALS ,
F
A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic
sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested
according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 '
deg C), and of the following general types:
1. Opaque Sheet: Provide colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the ,
manufacturer's standards.
SIGNS 10425-2
i
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
,
B.
Certificate of Occupancy Requirements: Provide interior signage for all permanent rooms and spaces on
each floor levels as required by the local building officials for Certificate of Occupancy.
'
C.
Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this
Project, with a record of successful in- service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce
sign units required without causing delay in the Work.
,
D.
Single- Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a
single manufacturer.
'
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate final accepted amount of interior signage required for each floor level with the Owner.
'
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2-
PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
,
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Panel Signs:
t
I. Manufacturers of
a. APCO Graphics, Inc.; IM Systems Interior Signs
b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
d. Environmental Graphic Systems, Inc.
C. Mohawk Sign Systems.
e. Poblocki & Sons, Inc.
,
2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:
a. Andco Industries Corp.
'
b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
C. Matthews International Corp.
d. Metal Arts.
C. Metallic Arts, Inc.
f, Spanjer Brothers, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS ,
F
A. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic
sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested
according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 '
deg C), and of the following general types:
1. Opaque Sheet: Provide colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the ,
manufacturer's standards.
SIGNS 10425-2
i
B. Exterior Panel Signs: Provide I" thick minimum, exterior grade wood panel sign, to be lit and
mounted per Architect /Owner.
1. Finish: Custom painted or carved wood with antiqued finish, per Architect.
' I. Brackets: Iron or aluminum mounting brackets, powder coated, color per Architect.
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,
shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed
conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Framed Panel Signs: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following requirements for
materials and corner conditions:
1. Material: Acrylic plastic.
2. Material: Injection molded ABS plastic.
a. The manufacturer has the option of using any material listed above.
3. Comer Condition: Square comers.
C. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket- mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit sign
' panel construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in a color matching the
background color of the sign panel.
' SIGNS
10425-3
'
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
B.
Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035 -inch minimum thickness, with pressure-
'
sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for exterior as well as interior applications.
C.
ABS Plastic: Provide high - impact thermoplastic composed of copolymers of acrylonitrile, butadiene, and
styrene.
D.
Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper recommended by the sign
manufacturer for the casting process used and for the use and finish indicated.
'
E.
Bronze Castings: Provide bronze castings, copper alloy UNS C83600, complying with the requirements
of ASTM B584.
'
F.
Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and
mounting surface.
F.
Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot - dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior
1
installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry
work.
G.
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip: Provide stainless steel plate, sheet, or strip, AISI Type 302,
complying with requirements of ASTM A 167_
H.
Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and
background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic
surface and are nonfading for the application intended.
2.3
PANEL SIGNS
B. Exterior Panel Signs: Provide I" thick minimum, exterior grade wood panel sign, to be lit and
mounted per Architect /Owner.
1. Finish: Custom painted or carved wood with antiqued finish, per Architect.
' I. Brackets: Iron or aluminum mounting brackets, powder coated, color per Architect.
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,
shapes, sizes, and details of construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under installed
conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Framed Panel Signs: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply with the following requirements for
materials and corner conditions:
1. Material: Acrylic plastic.
2. Material: Injection molded ABS plastic.
a. The manufacturer has the option of using any material listed above.
3. Comer Condition: Square comers.
C. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket- mounted signs from extruded aluminum to suit sign
' panel construction and mounting conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in a color matching the
background color of the sign panel.
' SIGNS
10425-3
i
LIoN SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements of the ADA for size,
style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic
devices.
E. Subsurface Copy: Apply copy to the back face of clear acrylic sheet forming the panel face to produce
precisely formed opaque images free from rough edges.
F. Attachment: After adhering signs with liquid silicone adhesive, mechanically fastened with tamper
resistant screws — one at each corner. G. Size: Design based on WS -Series Standard by "AS] Sign "or
approved substitute.
G. Provide directional signs with "Grade 2 Braille ".
H. Area of Refuge: Provide a sign stating "AREA FOR EVACUATION ASSISTANCE" with the
International Symbol of Access and illuminate the sign with the exit sign illumination.
DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
2.4
A. Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by casting. Produce characters with
smooth, flat faces, sharp comers, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand
holes, or other defects. Cast lags into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs.
Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
I. Metal: Aluminum.
2. Letter Height: 16" with 4" minimum spacing between letters.
3. Mounting height- bottom of letters to be 2" above horizontal mounting surface and recessed 2"
from front vertical face.
4, Letter Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's available range of letter styles.
2. 2.5
2.6
FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral
or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color as selected
by the Architect from the nmanufacturers standards.
B. Metal Finishes: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and
applications recommendations.
C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
1. Class II Clear Anodized Medium Satin Finish: AA -M31 C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin
directional textured; Chemical Finish: Medium matte etched finish; Anodic Coating: Class II
Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil).
D. Bronze Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "CDA" conform to the system established by the
Copper Development Association for designating finishes.
I. Natural Satin Finish: CDA- M3106x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Clear
Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard air -dry clear organic coating as specified below)
a) Clear Organic Coating: Air dried acrylic coating Incralac as developed by International
Copper Research Corporation, 1.0 —mil minimum dry thickness.
SIGNS 10425-4
I
F�
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the manufacturers instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or
other defects in appearance.
B. Wall- Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below:
I. Vinyl -Tape Mounting: Use double -sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous
surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl- covered or rough surfaces.
2. Silicone- Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign
manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl- covered surfaces_ Use double -sided
vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the
adhesive has fully cured.
3. Mechanical attachment: Mechanically fasten all signs with tamper resistant screws (1 at each
corner) after adhering sign to wall with liquid silicone adhesive. Caulk perimeter of sign.
C. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods
recommended by the manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of
exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for
fasteners.
1. Projected Mounting: Mount letters at the projection distance from the substrate surface indicated_
D. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recmmended by the manufacturer for the
type of wall surface indicated.
I. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on the back
of the plaque. Set in predrilled holes filled with quick setting cement.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
I I A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
I 1
INTERIOR SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
A. Provide one panel sign at each interior entrance to every room in building:
1. Include any entrances to rooms without doors or door frames.
2_ Include multiple entrances to same room.
3. Include stairways.
4. Elevators.
5. Include entrances where several rooms are located beyond a common entrance.
END OF SECTION 10425
' SIGNS
10425 -5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10506 - WOOD LOCKERS
PART ] - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wood lockers with flush or raised - panel, wood- veneer -faced wood doors.
B. See Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for concealed wood support base, furring, blocking,
shims, and hanging strips required for installing wood lockers and concealed within other construction
before wood locker installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for wood lockers.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
1. Show wood locker fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories.
2_ Show wood locker numbering sequence.
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accessibility Requirements:
. Provide not less than one shelf located within required reach ranges.
2. Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and that
operates with a force of not more than 5 Ibf (22.2 N).
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver wood lockers until painting and similar operations that could damage wood lockers have
been completed in installation areas. If wood lockers must be stored in other -than- installation areas, store
only in areas where environmental conditions are same as that in final installation location and comply
with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
B. Deliver master and control keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood lockers until building is enclosed, wet work is
complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
WOOD LOCKERS 10506- 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado t
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concealed wood support bases. '
1. Requirements are specified in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry."
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace '
components of wood lockers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures. '
2. Faulty operation of locks or hardware.
3. Deterioration of wood, wood finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
B. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. '
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
,
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Classic Woodworking, Inc.
2. Dimension Millworks.
3. Famous Lockers.
4. Fiberesin Industries, Inc.
,
5. Hollman, Inc.
6. Ideal Products, Inc.
7_ Multispace; Div. of Club Resource Group.
8. Treeforms.
'
2.2 MATERIALS '
A. Medium- Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD- Exterior Glue.
B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1, Type 1. '
C. Hardwood Face Veneers: HPVA HP -I, Grade A.
D_ Thennoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2, or medium- '
density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine -
impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1.
E. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15
percent moisture content.
F. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. ,
WOOD LOCKERS 10506-2 t
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
I. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.
2. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in -place anchors.
2.3 WOOD LOCKER HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard wood locker hardware and accessories complying with the
following:
B_ Frameless Hinges (European Type): Fully concealed, nickel - plated steel, with not less than 125 degrees
of opening.
C. Shelf Rests: BHMA A 156.9, B04013.
D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Per Architect.
2.4 DOOR LOCKS
A. General: Fabricate wood lockers to receive locking devices. Provide one locking device for each wood
locker door, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Cam Padlock Hasp: Surface mounted, steel; finished to match other wood locker hardware.
C. Cylinder Locks: Built -in, flush cam locks with five -pin tumbler keyway, keyed separately and master
keyed. Furnish two change keys for each lock and [five) <Insert number> master keys.
2.5 WOOD -FACED WOOD LOCKERS
A. Constriction Style: Flush overlay, Reveal overlay, Reveal overlay on face frame or as selected
byArchitect.
B. Locker Body: Fabricated from panic leboard-core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative
overlay.
I . Side Panels: Manufacturer's standard, 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 ntm) thick.
2. Back Panel: Manufacturer's standard, 1/2 or 3/8 inch (13 or 9.5 mm) thick.
3. Top Panel: Manufacturer's standard, 3/4 or 5/8 inch ( 19 or 16 mm) thick.
4. Bottom Panel: Manufacturer's standard, 3/4 or 5/8 inch (19 or 16 mm) thick.
5. Exposed Panel Edges: Thermoset decorative overlay to match panel_
C. Flush, Wood- Veneer -Faced Doors: Wood veneer applied over 314 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick core.
I. Species and cut: Cherry, rotary cut.
D. Raised - Panel, Wood- Veneer -Faced Doors: Stiles, rails, and center panel fabricated from 3/4 -inch- (19-
mm -) thick, wood - veneer - faced, medium - density fiberboard. Provide wood species and cut as follows:
1. Species and cut: Cherry, rotary cut.
E. End Panels: Match style, material, construction, and finish of wood -faced wood doors.
� I WOOD LOCKERS
10506-3
II
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
F_ Shelves: Fabricated from particleboard -core panels covered on both sides with thermoset decorative
overlay; fixed, unless otherwise indicated. '
1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Exposed Edges: Thermoset decorative overlay to match panels. ,
G. Corners and Filler Panels: Wood - veneer- faced, 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick panel that matches door faces.
2.6
LOCKER ACCESSORIES
'
A.
Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball- pointed, aluminum or steel; finished to match other wood locker
,
hardware_ Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.
,
B.
Coat Rods: 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) diameter steel; finished to match other wood locker hardware_
C.
Number Plates: 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm -) diameter, etched, embossed, or stamped, aluminum plates with
black numbers and letters at least 1/2 inch (13 mm) high. Identify wood lockers in sequence indicated on
Drawings. Finish plates to match other wood locker hardware.
D.
Continuous Finish Base: Wood- veneer faced, 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick panel that matches door faces;
i
C_
fabricated in lengths as long as practicable to enclose base and base ends of wood lockers.
E.
Continuously Sloping Tops: Wood- veneer faced, 3/4 -inch- (19 -mm -) thick panel that matches door faces
'
D.
for installation over wood lockers with separate flat tops. Fabricate tops in lengths as long as practicable,
,
E.
without visible fasteners at splice locations_ Provide fasteners, supports, and closures, as follows:
possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
2.7
WOOD LOCKER FABRICATION
A.
Unit Principle: Fabricate each wood locker with an individual door and frame, individual top, bottom,
back, and shelves, and common intermediate uprights separating compartments.
,
1. Fabricate wood lockers to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
2. Ease edges of corners of solid wood members to radius of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
B.
Fabricate components square, rigid, without warp, and with finished faces Flat and free of scratches and
chips. Accurately machine components for attachments in factory, with no chips. Make joints tight and
true.
I. Fabricate wood lockers using European 32 -mm doweled and glued construction.
C_
Venting: Fabricate wood lockers with space between doors and locker assembly of not less than 114 inch
(6 mm).
D.
Number Plates: Inlay number plates flush in each wood locker door, near top, centered.
,
E.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent
possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and
fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install
dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial
fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against
'
field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
'
WOOD
LOCKERS 10506-4
11 2.8
1]
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
F. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, electrical work, and similar items.
Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and
shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
FACTORY FINISHES FOR WOOD -FACED WOOD LOCKERS
A. General: Finish wood lockers at factory as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning,
and polishing until after installation.
B. Transparent Finish: Manufacturer's standard two -coat, clear, catalyzed lacquer finish with sanding
between coats. Seal with moisture- resistant topcoat.
1. Stain: Match Architect's sample.
I I PART 3 - EXECUTION
'
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Condition wood lockers to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation_
'
B.
Install level, plumb, and true over concealed wood support base; shim as required, using concealed shims.
C.
Connect groups of wood lockers together with manufacttuer's standard[ brass - finished] fasteners, through
predrilled holes, with no exposed fasteners on face frames. Fit wood lockers accurately together to form
flash, tight, hairline joints.
D.
Install wood lockers without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately
aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
'
operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
I. Installation Tolerance: No more than 1/8 inch in 96 -inch (3 mm in 2400 -mm) sag, bow, or other
variation from a straight line. Shim as required with concealed shims.
'
2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of wood -faced wood lockers with transparent finish.
3. Fasten wood lockers through back, near top and bottom, at ends with No. 8 brass - finished wood
screws sized for [-inch (25-min) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or furring spaced not
more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.
4. Fasten wood lockers through wood locker base, at ends and not more than 36 inches (910 mm)
o.c. with No. 8 brass - finished, flush -head wood screws sized for 1 -inch (25 -mm) penetration into
wood base.
E.
Scribe and cut corner and filler panels to fit adjoining work using fasteners concealed where practical.
Repair damaged Finish at cuts.
'
F.
Attach top to lockers, with end covering exposed ends.
sloping units wood panels
'
G.
Number Plates: Install plates after wood lockers are in place.
i. Attach number plate on each wood locker door, near top, centered, with at least two screws with
finish matching number plate.
'
H.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
WOOD LOCKERS 10506-5
II
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado ,
I. Touch up marred finishes, or replace wood lockers that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance.
Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by wood locker manufacturer. '
END OF SECTION 10506
C
7
WOOD LOCKERS 10506-6
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10520 - FIRE - PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PARTI - GENERAL
I.I SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire - protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.
3_ Fire - protection accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components
and profiles, and finishes for fire- protection specialties.
I . Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
2. Cabinets: Include roughing -in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of
box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style_
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on Samples of size
indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal
color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.
I . Size: 6-by -6 -inch- (150 -by- 150 -mm -) square Samples.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for
Portable Fire Extinguishers."
C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Maintenance: Provide filled -out Department of Transportation certificate #B -927, inspection tag, on each
extinguisher.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
I. Portable Fire Extinguishers: Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
FIRE - PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Fire- Protection Cabinets: Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Coordinate series and model number
with Architect for all fire protection cabinets.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated, and as follows:
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
D. Break Glass: Clear annealed float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single
strength.
E. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type 1, Quality q3,1.5 mm thick.
F. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A -I (cell -cast sheet), 3 mm thick, with Finish 1
(smooth or polished) or Finish 2 (patterned, textured).
G. Acrylic Bubble: One piece.
2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each cabinet and other locations
indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL -rated 4- A:60 -B:C, 10 -1b (4.5 -kg) nominal capacity, in enameled -
steel container.
2.4 FIRE - PROTECTION CABINETS
A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to
suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld
perimeter door frames.
B. Cabinet Construction: Rating to match wall of installation.
I _ Fire -Rated Cabinets: Constnict fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428 -inch-
(1.1 -mm -) thick, cold - rolled steel sheet lined with mininumt 5/8 -inch- (16 -mm -) thick, fire- barrier
material. Provide factory- drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
I. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Fire End & Croker Corporation
b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group
FIRE - PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
C. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc
d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company
e. Modem Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.
f. Moon- American
g. Potter Roemer LLC
h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.
D. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.
E. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.
1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished
surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed
flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead.
2. Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps surrounding wall
finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door_
3. Exposed Flat Trim: One -piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
' F. Door Glazing: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:
1. Acrylic: Smooth or textured sheet, as follows:
a. Thickness: 3 mm.
b. Color: Clear.
G. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design for cabinet type selected
H. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and
coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam - action latch,
or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous -type hinge
permitting door to open 180 degrees.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher, of sizes required for
types and capacities of extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked - enamel finish.
I. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
2_ Provide brackets for extinguishers located in cabinets.
B. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
I. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door.
a. Application Process: Silk- screened.
b. Lettering Color: Red.
C. Orientation: Vertical_
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
� I FIRE - PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10520-3
II
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B_ Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are
not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
I . Manufacturer's standard baked - enamel paint for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another
finish.
b. Interior of cabinet and door.
2. Aluminum: Color anodic.
a. Color: Dark bronze.
3. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.
a. Color and Gloss: Dark Bronze_
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing -in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping
connections before cabinet installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed
cabinets are to be installed.
C_ Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
L Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
12 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire- protection specialties.
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
I . Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Fasten mounting brackets to stricture and cabinets, square and plumb.
3. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10520
FIRE - PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-5
LEON SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 10801 -TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PARTI- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Private -use bathroom accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule:
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2_ Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.1 PRIVATE -USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. American Bathroom Accessories, Inc.
2. Basco, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Franklin Brass Manufacturing Co.
5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO).
6. Ginger; GUSA, Inc.
7. Seachrome Corporation.
B. Toilet accessories to be Bobrick or equal; stainless steel with welded joints, recessed mounting unless
otherwise indicated, heavy -duty commercial quality. Standards for Arapahoe Basin Ski Area shall be
clarified with Owner.
C. The following items are to be provided and installed at all toilet rooms (refer to plans for exact locations):
1. Grab Bars:
a. Bobrick B -6206 36 ", 1.5" diameter, all satin finish, concealed mounting.
b. Provide 2572 series concealed anchors for masonry walls, 256 series anchor plate for stud
walls and 2552 or 2572 series for toilet partitions.
2. Feminine Napkin- Tampon Vendor:
a. Manufacturer: Bobrick
b_ Model Number: B -3500 Trimline, or B -35007
C. Finish: Satin finish Stainless Steel
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1
LION SQUARE: LODGE, NORTH
Vail, Colorado
d. Size: l6 5/8" W x 25 1/16" H x 3 15/16" D
e. Note: Barrier Free installation, 51" to top of unit.
3. Toilet Tissue Dispenser/Napkin Disposal and Seat Cover dispenser:
a. Manufacturer: Bobrick
b. Model:
1) B -347 (Men) & B -3471 (Men ADA stall).
2) B -357 (Women) & B -3571 (Women ADA stall).
4. Soap Dispensers: Bobrick B -822, 4 inch spout, 34 oz. capacity
5. Waste Receptacles: Bobrick B-3644,4" recess, or free - standing (selection to follow)
6. Electric Hand Dryers:
a. Manufacturer: Excel Dryer, Inc.;
b. Contact info: 413 -525 -4531
C. Style: Xlerator Hand Dryers
d. Model Number: XL -C
C. Size: 11' /, "x 12 11 /16 "H x 6 I1 /16 "D
f. Finish: Chrome
g. Mounting: Surface
h. Quantity: 2 per bath.
7. Mop Holders and Shelves: Bobrick B -224, 48" long with 6 holders and 5 hooks, at Janitor Closet
8. Splash Guards: Provide wall mounted stainless steel splash guards on walls above mop basins to
height of faucets.
9_ Coat Hooks: Bobrick B -7672. Surface mount to fixture side of all toilet compartment doors.
10. Include anchorage devices, trim, and accessories as required for complete installation.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide
minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to
substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly
anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -2
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SECTION 11015 - ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. System design
2. Tie back anchors
3. Suspension line anchors
4. Fall arrest anchors
B. Products Supplied but not Installed Under this Section:
1. Imbed items
1.02 REFERENCES
. A. Publications listed herein are part of this specification to extent referenced.
B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
I. AISC Publication Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings
2. AISC Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members
' C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
I . ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel
2. ASTM A 123 Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel
Hardware
' 3. ASTM A500 Specification for Cold - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
4. ASTM A780 Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip
Galvanized Coatings
1 5. ASTM B209 -04 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate
6. ASTM B221 -02 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Wire,
Shapes and Tubes
D. American Welding Society (A WS):
1. AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
F_ Occupational, Health, and Safety Standards:
_ ANSI /IWCA 1 -14.1 Window Cleaning Safety
2. 1910, Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces)
3. 1910.66Appendix C (Personal Fall Arrest)
4. 1910.66 Subpart F (Powered Platfomis)
5. OSHA- Procedures and precautions for employees using descent control
equipment.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
Safety anchor system design shall comply with current OSHA, ANSI, and local
regulations pertaining to window cleaning and fall protection in accordance with sections
1.0 1 1.02 and 1.03.
2. Anchor system shall provide independent fall arrest anchorages in addition to working
Iine anchor for each descent location as required by OSHA and ANSI requirements.
r ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS
11015 -1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
System shall be designed to be compatible with current window cleaning industry
standard equipment (examples: boatswains chairs, swing stage, portable outriggers).
4. Structural requirements of anchorage used for rope descent:
a. Anchorage shall be capable of sustaining a minimum load of 5,000 pounds in any
direction without fracture or pullout (yield tensile strength). Anchor yield tensile
strength shall be verified by test repost.
b. Anchorage shall be capable of sustaining a minimum load of 2,500 lb. load in any
direction without permanent deformation (tensile load). Anchor tensile strength shall
be verified by lest repost.
c. Parapet or guardrails subject to direct loading by workers ropes, cables, etc. shall be
designed to withstand such loading (typically 1,800 lbs.) .
Locate primary support and fall arrest anchors in conjunction with areas on buildings'
fagade of building needing to be serviced. Consideration shall be given to the type of
suspension equipment that will be used at the building and conditions such as workers'
reach, rigging methods and roof edge conditions need be taken into consideration.
Anchorages shall be unobstructed and located behind and in line with equipment or
portion of building they are intended to service (See illustration at end of this section).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit scaled shop drawings showing location of each anchor and anchor sections
detailing all parts and accessories.
2. Clearly specify anchor dimensions, materials, fabrication details, hardware, and
installation instructions.
3. Anchor location plan shall include notes with guidelines of proper use of system.
4. Field welds shall be indicated on shop drawings using AWS symbols and showing length,
size and spacing (if not continuous). Auxiliary views shall be shown to clarify welding
as required. Notes such as 1/4 in. (6 mm) weld, or tack weld are not acceptable.
S. Shop drawings shall be prepared under supervision of a registered professional engineer
and shall bear engineer's seal. to be installed. Professional engineer shall be licensed in
jurisdiction where project is located. Include report of tested anchors.
B. Quality Assurance Submittals:
I. Certificates:
a. Provide documentation verifying company's length of experience and successful
performance in design, fabrication, and installation of permanent window
washing equipment.
b. Submit listing of company's installations representing similar scope and
complexity to project requirements for previous 5 years. List shall include
information as follows:
1) Project name and address
2) Name of owner
3) Name of contractor
4) Name of architect (if applicable)
5) Date of completion
C. Provide documentation verifying that installers have been trained by the
manufacturer and are competent.
C. Contract Close -out Submittals:
1. Operation and Maintenance:
ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS 11015-2
C!
r
1
t
1
1
�I
�I
C
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
a. Provide a safety inspection logbook for yearly inspections.
2. Project Record Document Data:
a. Record anchor locations and details.
b_ Submit 2 copies of a reduced, plastic laminated Project Record Drawing
showing as- installed anchor locations, details, and instructional text in both
English and Spanish. Posted near exits onto roof, owner shall establish exact
locations.
C. Submit a letter of certification by a registered professional engineer licensed in
jurisdiction where project is located verifying that installed anchors and system
are in compliance with OSHA and ANSI requirements as specified. Engineer
shall witness random testing of not less than four installed anchors (applying a
load as determined adequate by the engineer).
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
I. Provide products from a company specializing in design, fabrication, and installation of
permanent window washing equipment with a minimum of 5 years documented
experience. Miscellaneous metal fabricators not normally engaged in design and
fabrication of safety anchors are not acceptable.
2. Manufacturer and installer shall have specific liability insurance (products and completed
operations) in an amount not less than $2,000,000.
3. Installer shall be trained or qualified by manufacturer in installation techniques and
procedures of permanent window washing equipment and shall demonstrate a minimum
of 5 years successful experience in such installation_
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with Occupational, Health, and Safety Standards:
I. ANSI /IWCA 1 -14.1 Window Cleaning Safety
2. 1910, Subpart D (Walking and Working Surfaces)
3. 1910.66Appendix C (Personal Fall Arrest)
4. 1910.66 Subpart F (Powered Platforms)
5. OSHA Procedures and precautions for employees using descent control equipment.
2. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.1 and shall be performed by welders qualified to
work in jurisdiction where project is located.
3. Comply with AISC publications:
a. Load and Resistance Factor Design for Structural Steel Buildings
b. Specifications for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading
. Deliver materials in original unopened packaging.
B. Storage and Protection:
1. Store materials in a protected area, away from construction activities. Clean bolts that
have become dirty before installing.
2. Do not install damaged materials. Remove damaged materials from site_
1.07 SEQUENCING
A. Coordination:
I ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS
11015-3
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NOR'rH
Vail, Colorado
1. Coordinate delivery and furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of imbed items.
2. Provide advice and assistance for setting anchorage devices as needed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS & INSTALLERS
A. Available Exterior Maintenance System:
1. Summit Anchor Company
Tel: 800- 372 -1098 Fax: 301 - 620 -9819
Web Site: summitanchor.com
B. Equivalent or superior materials and or systems substitutions shall be submitted to architect of
record for review in compliance with substitution procedures in Section 01630 of this Project
Manual.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Structural Components: Stainless Steel; Type 304
1. Yield Strength: 42 ksi minimum
B. Exposed Structural Components: Galvanized Mild Steel
I . Steel: ASTM A36, Type 35W
2) Galvanizing: ASTM Ai 23
C. Yield Strength:
I ) High Strength Steel: 50 ksi minimum
2) Plate and Other Sections: 43 ksi minimum
D. Non - Structural Components: Aluminum; 6061 -T6 Alloy
I . Alloys shall conform to requirements published in AA Aluminum Standards.
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B209
3. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B221
E. Cold- Rolled Sections: ASTM A500
I. Yield Strength: 55 ksi minimum
2. Tensile Strength: 62 ksi minimum
F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
1. Steel: ASTM A36, galvanized to ASTM A 123
2. Stainless Steel: Type 304
G. Anchor Bolts (for securement of base plate):
I. Metal: Stainless steel, Type 304
2. Size: 5/8 in. diameter minimum
H. Adhesive (for se�.uring anchor bolts):
Product: Hilti HVA Anchoring System
2 Quantity: 4 adhesive fasteners per anchor
I. Anchor bolls (for Kin VIVA Anchoring System):
I . Length: As needed for 5 inches minimum embedment in concrete
2. Quantity: 4 bolts per anchor
ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS 11015-4
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A_ General Requirements:
I . Single insert cast -in -place material shall be stainless steel, Type 304.
2. When multiple cast -in -place steel studs are used complete anchor (including studs) shall
be hot - dipped galvanized.
B. Anchor Eye:
1. Capable of withstanding 5000 lbs. (2268kg) in any direction without permanent
deflection.
2. Size: Not less than 3 /4 -in. (20 mm) diameter material with 3 1/4 in (83 mm) eye opening
3. Metals:
a. Forged AISI 1018 (FY =70 ksi)
b. Stainless steel, type 304
C. Hollow Steel Section (HSS) Piers:
I. HSS sections A500 grade C (FY=46 ksi)
2. Wall Thickness: As needed to shit application but not less then 0.23 in.
3. Pier Height: not less 6 in. above finished roof surface
D. Base Plate and Other Sections:
I. Metal: 44W (FY =44 ksi)
2. Thickness and Securement: As needed to suit application
E. Corrosion resistance:
1. Anchor hot - dipped galvanized after fabrication, per ASTM A 123 specification.
2 After anchor is hot - dipped galvanized HSS sections filled with
molded urethane insulation to prevent condensation.
F_ Flashing with one E.P.D.M. gasket seal top and base:
I. Seamless Spun Aluminum Flashing: ASTM B221; Type 6061 -T6 alloy
2. Stainless Steel: 304
2.04 FABRICATION
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I. Fabricate work true to dimension, square, plumb, level and free from distortion or defects
detrimental to appearance and performance.
2. Grind off surplus welding material to ensure exposed surfaces are smooth so as not to
abrade workers ropes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions:
I. Examine areas and conditions under which permanent window washing equipment shall
be installed.
2. Report to general contractor any conditions that deviate from shop drawings, or any
defects in workmanship that would cause an unsafe installation. This report shall be
verified in writing to the general contractor and any other responsible party.
3. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of work_
ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS 11015-5
LION SQUARE LoDGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
4. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
5. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions and responsibility for
satisfactory performance by installer.
6. Faults occurring in work of this section due to acceptance of unsatisfactory conditions
shall be corrected at no additional cost to owner.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements:
1. Install window washing system in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Install
equipment level, tightly fitted, and flush to adjacent surfaces as needed for proper
installation.
2. Coordinate anchor installation with roofing installation to ensure a watertight and
warrantable condition of the roofing. Anchors shall be directly flashed into roofing in a
manner compatible with roofing system and anchors.
3. When components come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from
direct contact to prevent corrosion.
4. No wall anchors, cast -in -place or bolted through, shall be installed through membrane
roofing system.
5. Apply liquid "lock- tight" before engaging nut to threads to prevent loosening during Luse.
Deform a minimum of two threads of tail end of anchor studs after nuts have been
tightened to prevent accidental removal or vandalism.
C. Anchors Welded to Building Structure:
I. Clean metal surfaces of anchor or anchor plates of galvanizing (if not already done)
where anchor is to be welded to structure.
2. Clean metal surfaces of stricture of paint, mill scale, primer, or rust before welding
anchors to structure.
3. After welding, chip away slag and then paint welded areas with cold - galvanizing
compound to protect from corrosion.
4. All welders shall be AWS certified.
5. A qualified person shall inspect and confirm weld size with a welding gauge. Following
the inspection a written report must be supplied to the building owner and /or general
contractor.
6. Structural steel to receive roof or wall anchors shall have a surface wide enough so that
base plate is welded all the way around. For example, anchors equipped with 4 %z in.
(112.5 mm) base plates would require a minimum 5 '/- in. (137.5 mm) surface to weld to.
D. Adhesive Type Fasteners:
Installation of anchors mounted with adhesive type fasteners shall be performed only by
installers certified competent by the manufacturer.
2. Follow adhesive fasteners manufacturer's printed installation instructions and
specifications for placement and installing of adhesive anchors. Do not disturb or load
freshly set anchor until curing time elapses as per instructions_
D. Aluminum Flashing:
1. Deck flange shall be flashed in compliance with National Roofing Contractor Association
recommendations_
3.03 REPAIR/RESTORATION
A. Galvanizing Touch -Up:
I . Immediately after erection clean field welds and abraded areas_ Repair damaged areas in
compliance with ASTM A780.
ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS 11015-6
1
1
t
r
n
1
L
1
7
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests:
1. All anchors fastened with adhesive fasteners shall be tested on -site using load test
apparatus in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Load fasteners to loads as determined by structural engineer without any signs of pull
out, loosening, turning of fasteners or damage of any kind.
B_ Inspection:
1. Inspection shall be performed by a qualified professional engineer registered in
jurisdiction where project is located.
2. Inspection of each anchor where welded to structure shall be performed by a qualified
person verifying, in writing, size and quality of weld. Such an inspection shall be
performed before roofing material is installed.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service:
I. Manufacturer shall assist and/or supervise installation of window washing equipment
installed by others.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Verify that completed work has been installed correctly and products function properly. Make
adjustments where needed to ensure satisfactory operation.
B_ Complete inspection logbook to certify system for use noting any deviations, changes or
corrections from original shop drawings. Provide as -built anchor layout plan on 1 I in. x 17 in.
paper or larger together with annual inspection with log book.
I ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS
11015-7
II
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
SUGGESTED ANCHOR SPACING
DISTANCE BETWEEN ANCHORS AND POINT OF SUSPENSION (DROP)
35'-D`
30' -0'
25'-0'
20' -0"
PARAPET WALL - 1D'-0'
CL R�� 5-0
END OF SECTION
ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS 11015-8
I
I
{ MAIN
I LINE
I
I
0
Z
iv +Q bi
FALL ARREST LINE
u�
I. jt—j
OFFSET F,gtt
Q
AR
C NOTES:
1) A 42' GUARDRAIL OR FALL ARREST
PROTECTION IB REQUIRED WHEN
PLAN VIEW
PLACING ANCHORS LESS THAN SIX FEET
ANCHO
FROM THE ROOFS EDGE.
2) FALL ARREST UNE OFFSET SHOULD BE KEPT AT A
MINIMUM, T-W MAXIMUM.
END OF SECTION
ROPE DESCENT SYSTEMS 11015-8
PART]- GENERAL
SECTION 14240 — ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes roped hydraulic passenger elevators.
B. See Division 9 Section "Dimension Stone Flooring" for flooring in elevator cars.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
' A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar
information.
B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large -scale details indicating service at each
landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction,
and locations of equipment and signals. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum
dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average
power demands.
C. Samples: For exposed finishes.
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine
room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are
adequate for elevator system being provided_
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having
jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation
Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair,
restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
I ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240- 1
1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
1.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance
service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of wom or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper
elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FX
MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
I. Fujitec America, Inc.
2. KONE Inc.
3. Otis Elevator Co.
4. Schindler Elevator Corp.
5. ThyssenKnrpp Elevator, basis of design.
a. Manufacturer:
ThyssenKrupp
b. Model:
ISIS 2500
C. Capacity:
25004
d. Stops:
8 (eight), and 7 (seven) stops
C_ Speed:
200 fpm
f Door Configuration:
Per drawings
2.2
SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems, including standard components published by
manufacturer as included in standard preengineered elevator systems and as required for complete
system.
B. Pump Units: Positive - displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and
firll load and with minimum pulsations. Provide either of the following:
I. Pump mounted on oil tank with vibration isolation mounts. Enclose pump in prime- painted steel
enclosure lined with 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) thick, glass -fiber insulation board.
2. Submersible pump, suspended inside oil tank from vibration isolation mounts.
3. Provide motor with wye -delta or solid -state starting.
C. Hydraulic Silencers: Provide hydraulic silencer containing pulsation - absorbing material in a blowout -
proof housing at pump unit.
D. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, readily biodegradable, fire- resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with
antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal- passivating additives. Hydraulic fluid is approved by
elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment_
I. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil
Division, Inc.
r�
t
I
t
ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-2 1
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
E. Protective Cylinder Casing: PVC or HDPE pipe casing complying with ASME A17.1, of sufficient size
to provide not less than 1 -inch (25 -mm) clearance from cylinder and extending above pit Floor. Provide
means to monitor casing effectiveness to comply with ASME A 17.1.
F. Guides: Provide either roller guides or sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
If sliding guides are used, provide guide -rail lubricators or polymer- coated, nonlubricated guides.
2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator as required
to provide type of operation system indicated.
B. Single -Car Auxiliary Operations:
I. Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, car is returned to a designated floor
and parked with doors open. Car can be manually put in service on standby power, either for
return operation or for regular operation, by switches in control panel located at fire command
station.
2. Standby - Powered Lowering: On activation of standby power, car is lowered to the lowest floor,
opens its doors, and shuts down.
3. Battery- Powered Lowering: When power fails, car is lowered to the lowest floor, opens its doors,
and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.
2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor -
controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light
beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, a loud
buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.
2.5 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A I008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed.
B. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 101 t/A 101 IM, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
C. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
D. Stainless -Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Stainless -Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M), Alloy 6063_
G_ Plastic Laminate: High - pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or HGL.
II ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-3
H
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2.6
CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide enameled -steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with car roof, access
doors, power door operators, and ventilation.
I . Provide standard railings complying with ASME A 17.1 on car tops where required by
ASME A 17.1.
2. Wood Millwork Wall and Door Panels: Wood veneer adhesively applied to manufacturer's
standard core with manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Wood veneer species,
grain and finish as selected by Architect.
3. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
4. Ceiling: Metal ceiling with halogen downlight fixtures, Architect to approve selections.
5. Card -Key Operators: to provide access to new units at:
a. East Tower: Levels 2 -5
b. West Tower: Levels 2 -5
2.7
HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal - sliding, door - and -frame hoistway entrances
complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories.
Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self- supporting frames with
reinforced head sections.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
t. Stainless -Steel Frames: Formed from stainless -steel sheet.
2. Wood Veneer Doors: Flush, hollow -metal constriction; fabricated by laminating wood veneer to
exposed faces of enameled cold - rolled steel doors and covering edges with protective edge trim.
Wood veneer species, grain and finish as selected by Architect.
3. Sills, Trim and Cab: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
4. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107.
SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
2.8
A. General: Provide hall -call and car -call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been
fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with long -life incandescent lamps and acrylic or other permanent,
nonyellowing translucent plastic diffusers or LEDs.
B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard car control stations. Mount in return panel
adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S.
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials
preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station.
System provides two -way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that
indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is
contained in flush - mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power
supply.
ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-4
11
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
D. Firefighters' Two -Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide telephone jack in each car and
required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two -way telephone communication service
specified in Division 13 Section "Fire Alarm."
E_ Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital -type car position indicator, located above car door or
above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping
at or passing each of the floors served.
I . Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.
F. Hall Push - Button Stations: Provide hall push -button stations at each landing as indicated.
G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows.
1. Manufacturer's standard wall- mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.
2. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame.
H_ Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of
travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
1. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push - button stations, with text and
graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install guide rails, framing and accessories per manufacturer's proprietary system. Manufacturer's
representative to inspect and approve system before commissioning.
B. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in
place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder
guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides.
C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel.
D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary
or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and
by governing regulations and agencies_
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes:
1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to
protect finishes from damage.
II ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-5
LION SQUARE LODGE NORTH
Vail, Colorado
2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect
elevator and elevator equipment.
3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service.
4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction.
Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish
entire unit, or provide new units as required.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory- authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 14240
ROPED HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240-6